Académique Documents
Professionnel Documents
Culture Documents
Motor Protection
Accessories
Contactors
♦
Motor Protection
♦
Accessories
Low Voltage Products
1 Product Range
Accessories
4 for A, AE, BC, EH, EK Contactors
and N, KC Contactor Relays
★
★ ★
★
★
★ VDE
★ ★ UTE
9 Dimensions
Reference Index
10 List of Addresses
As part of its on-going product improvement, ABB reserves the right to modify the characteristics of the products described in this catalogue.
The information given is not contractual. For further details please contact the ABB company marketing these products in your country.
There is no label on ABB L.V. control apparatus identifying a national certification organization.
The ABB logo figuring on devices, labels and documents certifies the conformity of devices with
respect to the applicable standards.
CE marking is proof of conformity with the European Directives concerning the product. It must
not be confused with a mark of quality.
However, for some countries and some ship certification and classification organizations,
certification is compulsory. In this case, the mark (or logo) of the given organization figures on the
devices if so required (see pages 7/4 and 7/5).
Liability
The devices in this catalogue do not endanger safety when they are installed, mounted and used
according to their application and in compliance with the installation rules and standards which
apply to them.
Quality
ABB has set up a quality assurance organisation in compliance with the requirements of
ISO 9001 standard.
ABB factories are ISO 9001 approved.
ABB Low Voltage Products meet with a high quality standard. It is developed, manufactured and
tested under the sole responsibility of ABB.
In compliance with the regulations set out by the ISO 9000 series standard, ABB sets up and
manages the procedures and files relating to product quality and actions having an effect on
quality.
Guarantee
The information contained in this catalogue reflects the current state of our knowledge and aims
to present our products and their possible applications. Thus, the information does not guarantee
certain specific characteristics of products or their aptitude for a specific utilization. All filed legal
patents or industrial property rights must be respected.
The currents given below concern standard, 1 500 r.p.m. 50 Hz, three-phase cage motors.
These values are for your information and may vary according to the motor manufacturer and depending on the number of poles.
A.C. Coils
D.C. Coils
Types of contactors:
KC, BC - and AE -, GAE 75
KC, BC - AE -, GAE 75
V.d.c Code Code Code
R■..■ R■ ■ .. Types of contactors V d.c. ■ ■
12 0..7 8 0 12 (2) D A
24 0..1 8 1 24 D B
42 0..2 8 2 36 D C
48 1..6 8 3 48 D D
EH 145 - EH 800
50 1..7 2 1 60 D T
60 0..3 8 4 EK 110 - EK 550 75 D G
75 2..2 8 5 110 D E
110 0..4 8 6 125 D U
125 2..7 8 7 220 D F
220 0..5 8 8 (2) Unsuitable for EH 370 - EH 800, EK 370 and EK 550 contactors.
240 3..3 8 9
250 3..4 3 8
Ordering Details
When placing an order give either the Order Code or Type.
In most cases these are completed with other references, e.g. a contactor's coil voltage. This is why the order codes and types figuring in the "Ordering
Details" tables have boxes ■ to be completed.
Packaging
● Individual standard packaging
Contactors, contactor relays, thermal overload relays and other basic products are supplied in individual packaging. Some small contactors (e.g.
B6 and B7 - Section 6) or accessories are in individual batches of "n" pieces as indicated in the "Packaging" column of the "Ordering Details"
table.
The weight and order code always correspond to a single part.
Other products are supplied as a "set" and are thus marked in the "Packaging" column of the "Ordering Details" table. In this case, the weight and
order code correspond to a set.
● Collective packaging
To limit the amount of wasted packaging, simplify handling and checking of deliveries, we offer the collective packaging solution.
The weight and order code correspond to a single part.
Type Order code Product Packing Weight Type Order code Product Packing Weight
features features
Clearly marked to be completed with
coil voltage: ■ coil voltage: ■■
see below See below See page : pieces kg See page : pieces kg
Product Range
Contents
s
i c a tion Section 2 Block Contactors Pages
l
App
● 3-pole
A, EH Contactors, a.c. operated 2/12, 2/13
● 3-pole
UA Contactors, a.c. operated 2/21
p a citor
h a se ca ing
3- switch
p
A, EH Contactors, a.c. operated 2/12, 2/13
● 1-pole
GA Contactor, a.c. operated 2/28
● 3-pole
t A, EH Contactors, a.c. operated 2/46, 2/47
. c i rcui
c
d. tchin g BC, AE, EH Contactors, d.c. operated 2/46…2/48
swi
● 4-pole
A, EK Contactors, a.c. operated 2/46, 2/47
s
i c a tion Section 2 Block Contactors Pages
l
App
● 3-pole 1
A Contactors, a.c. operated 2/44, 2/45
it
g c ircu
tin g
ligh witchin ● 4-pole
s A Contactors, a.c. operated 2/44, 2/45
● 3-pole
ase
3-ph ormer
A, EH Contactors, a.c. operated 2/49
sf
tranitching AE, EH Contactors, d.c. operated 2/49
sw
● 3-pole
ase A, EH Contactors, a.c. operated 2/50, 2/51
3-phg motor
-rin g
slip witchin
s
● 3-pole
E 16 DU Electronic O/L Relay 5/19
or
Mot tion
ec
prot
T, TA Thermal O/L Relays 5/4…5/6
ions Section 6
Mini Contactors,
c a t Compact Reversing Contactors
li Pages
App
● 3-pole
B 6, B 7 Mini Contactors, a.c. operated 6/2
● 4-pole
B 6, B 7 Mini Contactors, a.c. operated 6/2
t
. c i rcui
a.c tching
swi
● 3-pole
VB 6, VB 7 Compact Reversing Contactors, a.c. operated 6/3
VB 6A, VB 7A Compact Reversing Contactors, a.c. operated 6/4
● 3-pole
B 6, B 7 Mini Contactors, a.c. operated 6/11
● 4-pole
B 6, B 7 Mini Contactors, a.c. operated 6/11
c i r cuit
d.c. tching
swi
● 3-pole
VB 6, VB 7 Compact Reversing Contactors, a.c. operated 6/11
ions Section 6
Mini Contactors,
c a t Compact Reversing Contactors
li Pages
App
1
● 3-pole
B 6, B 7 Mini Contactors, a.c. operated 6/12
● 4-pole
cuit
B 6, B 7 Mini Contactors, a.c. operated 6/12
c i r
ting g
ligh witchin
s
● 3-pole
VB 6, VB 7 Compact Reversing Contactors, a.c. operated 6/12
● 3-pole
BC 6, BC 7 Interface Mini Contactors, d.c. operated 6/5
t e r face
In
● 3-pole
B 6S, B 7S Mini Contactors for PLC's Output, d.c. operated 6/5
O u tput
's
PLC
● 3-pole
or T 7 DU Thermal Overload Relay 6/17
Mot tion
ec
prot
s
i c a tion Section 3 Contactor Relays Pages
l
App
● 4-pole
N Contactor Relays, a.c. operated 3/6
TKC Contactor Relays, d.c. operated, large coil voltage range 3/7
t
l c i rcui
tro g
Con witchin
s ● 8-pole
N Contactor Relays, a.c. operated 3/6
TKC Contactor Relays, d.c. operated, large coil voltage range 3/7
● 4-pole
t
l c i rcui K 6 Mini Contactor Relays, a.c. operated 6/6
tro g
Con witchin
KC 6 Mini Contactor Relays, d.c. operated 6/6
KC 6 Interface Mini Contactor Relays, d.c. operated 6/6
s K 6S Mini Contactor Relay for PLC's Output, d.c. operated 6/6
Contents
2
Selection Tables
A and EH 3-pole Contactors ................................................................................................. 2/2
A and EK 4-pole Contactors ............................................................................................... 2/4
Star-delta Starting ............................................................................................................. 2/31
Ordering Details
A 3-pole Contactors - A.C. Operated ................................................................................ 2/12
EH 3-pole Contactors - A.C. Operated ............................................................................. 2/13
BC 3-pole Contactors - D.C. Operated ............................................................................. 2/14
AE and EH 3-pole Contactors - D.C. Operated ................................................................ 2/15
A and EK 4-pole Contactors - A.C. Operated ................................................................... 2/16
BC, AE and EK 4-pole Contactors - D.C. Operated .......................................................... 2/17
A 4-pole Contactors with N.O. and N.C. Main Poles - A.C. Operated .............................. 2/18
BC and AE 4-pole Contactors with N.O. and N.C. Main Poles - D.C. Operated ............... 2/19
3-pole Contactors for 3-phase Capacitor Switching - A.C. Operated ................................ 2 / 20
– UA 3-pole contactors .................................................................................................... 2 / 21
– UA..-R 3-pole contactors ............................................................................................... 2 / 22
TBC and TAE Contactors - D.C. Operated with Large Coil Voltage Range ..................... 2/24
AF Contactors with Controlled Supply A.C./D.C. Operated .............................................. 2/26
GA 75 and GAE 75 Contactors for D.C. Circuit Switching ................................................ 2/28
EHL and EKL Magnetically Latched Contactors - A.C./D.C. Operated ............................. 2/29
EH Mechanically Interlocked or Mechanically Latched Contactors .................................. 2/30
Technical Data
A, EH and EK Contactors - A.C. Operated ....................................................................... 2/32
BC, AE and EH, EK Contactors - D.C. Operated .............................................................. 2/38
Lighting Circuit Switching .................................................................................................. 2/44
D.C. Circuit Switching ......................................................................................................... 2/46
LV/LV 3-phase Transformer Switching ............................................................................. 2/49
Control of 3-phase Slip-ring Motors .................................................................................... 2/50
Influence of the Length of Conductors Used in Contactor Control Circuit ........................ 2/52
Parallel Connection of Main Poles - Temporary or Intermittent Duty ................................ 2/54
Contactor Utilization Categories and Electrical Durability ................................................. 2/55
Additional Information
Accessories and Coils ............................................................................................... Section 4
General Technical Data, Approvals and Classifications ........................................... Section 7
Terminal Marking and Positioning ............................................................................. Section 8
Dimensions ............................................................................................................... Section 9
Coil consumption
Average pull-in value - 50 Hz VA 70 120 180
- 60 Hz VA 80 140 210
- 50/60 Hz (4) VA/VA 74/70 125/120 190/180
Average holding value - 50 Hz VA/W 8/2 12/3 18/5.5
- 60 Hz VA/W 8/2 12/3 18/5.5
- 50/60 Hz (4) VA/W 8/2 12/3 18/5.5
Mechanical durability
in millions of operating cycles 10
Electrical durability for Ie / AC-3 max.
in millions of operating cycles 1.5
Type TA 42 DU
Setting range A 18 - 42
TA 25 DU TA 42 DU TA 75 DU
(1) For the corresponding kW/hp/A value of 1500 r.p.m., 50 Hz, 3-phase motors, refer to page 0/0. (2) Temperature close to contactor.
(3) For short-circuit protection of motor starters, see page 7/17 (4) 50/60 Hz coils: voltage codes ■
8 ■
0 to ■
8 ■
8 , see page 0/1.
3-pole contactors Type A 95 A 110 EH 145 EH 175 EH 210 EH 260 EH 300 EH 370 EH 550 EH 700 EH 800
gG (gI) max. fuses A 160 200 250 355 355 500 500 630 800 1000 1000
Coil consumption
Average pull-in value - 50 Hz VA 350 430 800 1100 2600 3500
- 60 Hz VA 450 490 900 1200 2900 4000
- 50/60 Hz (4) VA/VA 410/365 460/400 500 630 2800/2450 3800/3400
Average holding value - 50 Hz VA/W 22/6.5 30/11 44/15 52/18 90/36 125/50
- 60 Hz VA/W 26/8 35/12 52/18 65/22 105/44 140/60
- 50/60 Hz (4) VA/W 27/7.5 38/12 2.5/2.5 2.5/2.5 100/47 140/60
Mechanical durability
in millions of operating cycles 10 10 5
(1) For the corresponding kW/hp/A value of 1500 r.p.m., 50 Hz, 3-phase motors, refer to page 0/0. (2) Temperature close to contactor.
(3) For short-circuit protection of motor starters, see page 7/17 (4) 50/60 Hz coils: voltage codes ■8 ■
0 to ■
8 ■
8 and E ■ , see page 0/1.
please consult co-ordination tables (ref. ITSCB 649171/002 9-1996).
Coil consumption
Average pull-in value - 50 Hz VA 70 120 180
- 60 Hz VA 80 140 210
- 50/60 Hz (2) VA/VA 74/70 125/120 190/180
Average holding value - 50 Hz VA/W 8/2 12/3 18/5.5
- 60 Hz VA/W 8/2 12/3 18/5.5
- 50/60 Hz (2) VA/W 8/2 12/3 18/5.5
Mechanical durability
in millions of operating cycles 10
Electrical durability for Ie / AC-1 max.
in millions of operating cycles See curves page 2/56
(1) Temperature close to contactor.
(2) 50/60 Hz coils: voltage codes ■
8 ■
0 to ■
8 ■
8 , see page 0/1.
Coil consumption
Average pull-in value - 50 Hz VA 800 1100 3500 3500
- 60 Hz VA 900 1200 4000 4000
- 50/60 Hz (2) VA/VA 500 630 3800/3400 3800/3400
Average holding value - 50 Hz VA/W 44/15 52/18 125/50 125/50
- 60 Hz VA/W 52/18 65/22 140/60 140/60
- 50/60 Hz (2) VA/W 2.5/2.5 2.5/2.5 140/60 140/60
Mechanical durability
in millions of operating cycles 5
A and AE Contactors
Description
Application
A contactors are mainly used for controlling 3-phase motors and generally speaking for controlling power circuits corresponding to their operating
characteristics up to 690 and even 1000 V a.c. and 440 V d.c.
● Contact variants:
– 3-pole contactors - with N.O. or N.C. built-in auxiliary contact for A 9 - A 40 contactors.
- with or without side-mounted, factory-assembled auxiliary contacts for A 50 - A 110 contactors.
– 4-pole contactors: 4-pole make or 2-pole make and 2-pole break without mounted auxiliary contacts.
– 3-pole/2-stack contactors: the first stack is made of a standard 3-pole contactor and the second stack of an irremovable 4-pole auxiliary contact
block. The width does not exceed that of the 1-stack contactor, only the depth is increased.
Quick fixing on mounting rail according to IEC 715, Location of surge suppressors
EN 50022 and EN 50023 standards:
35 x 7.5 mm for A 9 - A 40,
35 x 15 mm for A 9 - A 75, Clear marking of coil voltages and frequencies.
75 mm for A 45 - A 110.
● Ordering Details ......................................................... pages 2/12, 2/16 ● General - Approvals .............................................................. Section 7
● Technical Data ....................................................................... page 2/32 ● Terminal Marking and Positioning ....................................... Section 8
● Accessories ............................................................................ Section 4 ● Dimensions ............................................................................. Section 9
A and AE Contactors
Accessories and Thermal O/L Relays
* Use electronic timer TE 5S (page 4/6) with A(E) 95 and A(E) 110 contactors.
The same accessories can be added on to A 9, A 16, A 26, A 45, A50 and A 75 4-pole contactors as 3-pole contactors.
EH and EK Contactors
Description
Application
EH 3-pole contactors are mainly used for controlling 3-phase motors and generally speaking for controlling power circuits corresponding to their
operating characteristics up to voltages of 1000 V a.c. and 440 V d.c.
EK 4-pole contactors are mainly used for controlling back-up circuits and all distribution circuits where the neutral needs to be broken.
● Ordering Details ........................................................... pages 2/13, 2/15, 2/16 ● General - Approvals ......................................................... Section 7
● Technical Data ....................................................................... pages 2/33, 2/39 ● Terminal Marking and Positioning ................................. Section 8
● Accessories ....................................................................................... Section 4 ● Dimensions ....................................................................... Section 9
EH and EK Contactors
Accessories and Thermal O/L Relays
BC Contactors
Description
Application
BC contactors are mainly used for controlling 3-phase motors and generally speaking for controlling power circuits corresponding to their operating
characteristics up to 690 V a.c. and 440 V d.c.
● Contact variants:
– 3-pole contactors with built-in N.O. or N.C. auxiliary contact for BC 9 - BC 25 contactors.
– 4-pole contactors: 4-pole make or 2-pole make and 2-pole break without built-in auxiliary contacts.
– 2-stack 3-pole contactors: the first stack is made of a standard contactor and the second stack of an irremovable 4-pole auxiliary contact block.
The width does not exceed that of the 1-stack contactor, only the depth is increased.
Quick fixing on mounting rail according to IEC 715 Dove tail anchoring for surge suppressor
and EN 50022 standards: assembly.
– 35 x 7.5 mm,
– 35 x 15 mm.
Clear marking of coil d.c. voltage.
BC 9 - BC 30
● Ordering Details .................................................... pages 2/14, 2/17, 2/19, 2/24 and 2/25 ● General - Approvals .................................................................. Section 7
● Technical Data .................................................................................................. page 2/38 ● Terminal Marking and Positioning .......................................... Section 8
● Accessories ....................................................................................................... Section 4 ● Dimensions ............................................................................... Section 9
BC Contactors
Accessories and Thermal O/L Relays
The same accessories can be added on to BC 9, BC 16 and BC 25 4-pole contactors as 3-pole contactors.
* For selection and use of surge suppressors, see notes page 4/14.
A 95-30-00
● Technical Data ...................................................... page 2/32 ● General - Approvals .............................................. Section 7
● Accessories ........................................................... Section 4 ● Terminal Marking and Positioning ...................... Section 8
● Thermal O/L Relays .............................................. Section 5 ● Dimensions ............................................................ Section 9
EH 370-30-11 ■ SK 827 004- ■ ■ 1 1 550 400 110 200 220 355 12.40
EH 370-30-22 ■ SK 827 030- ■ ■ 2 2 550 400 110 200 220 355 12.45
EH 550-30-11 ■ SK 827 005- ■ ■ 1 1 800 550 160 280 315 500 12.40
EH 550-30-22 ■ SK 827 031- ■ ■ 2 2 800 550 160 280 315 500 12.45
EH 700-30-11 ■ SK 828 004- ■ ■ 1 1 1000 700 220 370 400 600 17.10
SB 7348S2
EH 700-30-22 ■ SK 828 030- ■ ■ 2 2 1000 700 220 370 400 600 17.15
EH 800-30-11 ■ SK 828 005- ■ ■ 1 1 1000 750 220 400 425 650 17.30
EH 260-30-11
EH 800-30-22 ■ SK 828 031- ■ ■ 2 2 1000 750 220 400 425 650 17.35
EH 370-30-11
SB 7351S3
EH 700-30-11
● Technical Data ............................................ pages 2/33, 2/39 ● General - Approvals .............................................. Section 7
● Accessories ............................................................. Section 4 ● Terminal Marking and Positioning ...................... Section 8
● Thermal O/L Relays ................................................ Section 5 ● Dimensions ............................................................ Section 9
1 – – – 22 9 2.2 4 4 4 0.54
BC 9-30-01 ■ FPL 141 3001 R ■ 01 ■ – 1 – – 22 9 2.2 4 4 4 0.54
BC 30-30-00
Mounting Positions of BC contactors.
The following table gives the permissible mounting positions depending on the ambient temperature, contactor
coil operating limits and whether or not there are add-on accessories: auxiliary contact blocks, pneumatic timer.
≤ 55
BC 9 - BC 25 - 30 - 10
BC 30 - 30 - 00
BC 9 - 30 - 01
BC 16 - 30 - 01
} 1, 3, 4 0.85 -1.1
1±30°, 2, 6 0.95 -1.1
1
1
to
to
4
4
1
1
1
1
BC 25 - 30 - 01 5* 0.85 -1.1 1 to 4 inc. 2xN.C. max. 1** TP..DA
> 55
and
BC 9 - BC 25 - 30 - 10
BC 30 - 30 - 00
BC 9 - 30 - 01
} 1, 1± 30°,
2, 3, 4 Uc 1 to 4 1 1
≤ 70 BC 16 - 30 - 01 5* Uc 1 to 4 inc. 2xN.C. max. 1** TP..DA
BC 25 - 30 - 01
* In position 5, do not use the RD7 diode unit: consult us. Maximum operating voltage: Ue < 440 V a.c.
** In position 5, do not use the CA5-04 auxiliary contact block.
Note: For selection and use of surge suppressors (e.g. diode, varistor, etc.), see notes page 4/14.
EH 370-30-21 ■ SK 827 004- ■ ■ 2 1 550 400 110 200 220 355 12.40
EH 550-30-21 ■ SK 827 005- ■ ■ 2 1 800 550 160 280 315 500 12.40
SB 7592S4
EH 700-30-21 ■ SK 828 004- ■ ■ 2 1 1000 700 220 370 400 600 17.10
EH 210-30-11
■
EH 800-30-21■ SK 828 005- ■ ■ 2 1 1000 750 220 400 425 650 17.30
Ordering Details
Type Order code Mounted aux. Rated operational Weight
State coil to be completed with coil contacts current in kg
voltage: ■ voltage code: ■ ■ AC -1 AC-1
θ ≤ 40°C θ ≤ 55°C Packing
See page 0/1 See page 0/1 A A 1 piece
SB 7314S2
EK 175-40-11
SB 7343S3
EK 370-40-11
● Technical Data ....................................................... page 2/32 ● Terminal Marking and Positioning ...................... Section 8
● Accessories ............................................................. Section 4 ● Dimensions ............................................................ Section 9
● General - Approvals ................................................ Section 7
Ordering Details
Type Order code Mounted aux. Rated operational Weight
State coil to be completed with coil contacts current in kg
voltage: ■ voltage: ■ ■ AC -1 AC-1
θ ≤ 40°C θ ≤ 55°C Packing
See page 0/1 See page 0/1 A A 1 piece
SB 6992S2
AE 50-40-00
Block Diagram for AE Contactor Coil Supply.
≤ 55 BC 9 - BC 25 - 40 - 00
} 1, 3, 4 0.85 -1.1
1±30°, 2, 6 0.95 -1.1
1
1
to
to
4
4
1
1
1
1
5* 0.85 -1.1 1 to 4 inc. 2xN.C. max. 1** TP..DA
and
> 55
BC 9 - BC 25 - 40 - 00
} 1,1±30°,2,3,4 Uc 1 to 4 1 1
< 70 5* Uc 1 to 4 inc. 2xN.C. max. 1** TP..DA
* In position 5, do not use the RD7 diode unit, please consult us. Maximum operating voltage: Ue < 440 V a.c.
** In position 5, do not use the CA5-04 auxiliary contact block.
Note: For selection and use of surge suppressors (e.g. diode, varistor, etc.), see notes page 4/14.
Description
● 4-pole contactors fitted with 2 N.C. main poles and 2 N.O. main poles.
● These contactors are suitable for controlling 2 separate circuits, i.e. 2 loads with 2 separate supplies, or
1 circuit comprising 2 separate loads with a single supply (see diagram below). When the contactor operates
there is no mechanical overlapping between the N.O. poles and the N.C. poles: BREAK before MAKE.
These contactors are not suitable for a reversing starter or star-delta starter or for controlling a single
load from 2 separate supplies.
Block Diagrams
● Single supply and 2 separate loads ● 2 separate supplies and 2 separate loads
SB 7588S4
A 26-22
Ordering Details
Type Order code Mounted Rated operational Weight
State coil to be completed with coil aux. contacts current at Ue ≤ 690 V in kg
voltage: ■ voltage: ■■ AC -1 AC-1
θ ≤ 40°C θ ≤ 55°C Packing
See page 0/1 See page 0/1 A A 1 piece
A 9-22-00 ■ (1) 1SBL 14 1501 R ■ ■ 00 – – 25 22 0.34
A 16-22-00 ■ (1) 1SBL 18 1501 R ■ ■ 00 – – 30 27 0.34
A 26-22-00 ■ 1SBL 24 1501 R ■ ■ 00 – – 45 40 0.61
A 45-22-00 ■ (1) (2) 1SBL 33 1501 R ■ ■ 00 – – 70 60 1.40
A 75-22-00 ■ (1) (2) 1SBL 41 1501 R ■ ■ 00 – – 125 105 1.40
(1) For A 9 and A 16-22 in position 5 or A 45 and A 75-22 in positions 1, 2, 3, 4, or 6 (position 5 unauthorised), do not use more than 2 add-on front-
mounted N.C. auxiliary contact blocks. CAL 5-11 side-mounted blocks provide extra N.C. auxiliary contacts
SB 7819S4
Mounting positions: – 60 Hz Coil Voltage: for mounting positions 1 to 4 and ambient temperature < 55 °C: tolerance reduced to 0.9 - 1.1 Uc
(instead of 0.85 - 1.1 Uc) for 7 ■ and 8 ■ coil voltage codes.
This only concerns devices fitted with CA 5 - and CAL 5-11 auxiliary contacts or TP timer.
Position 5 unauthorised.
For mounting position 6 or ambient temperature of +55 to +70 °C, the information given on page 2/34 remains applicable.
● Technical Data ....................................................... page 2/32 ● Terminal Marking and Positioning ...................... Section 8
● Accessories ............................................................. Section 4 ● Dimensions ............................................................ Section 9
● General - Approvals ................................................ Section 7
Ordering Details
Type Order code Mounted Rated operational Weight
State coil to be completed with coil aux. contacts current at Ue ≤ 690 V in kg
voltage: ■ voltage: ■■ AC -1 AC-1
θ ≤ 40°C θ ≤ 55°C Packing
See page 0/1 See page 0/1 A A 1 piece
BC 9-22-00 ■ FPL 141 3501 R ■ 00 ■ – – 22 20 0.540
2
SB 6993S3
≤ 55
BC 9 - 22 - 00
BC 16 - 22 - 00
} 1, 2, 3, 4
1 ± 30°
0.85 -1.1 1 to 4 inc. 2xN.C max.
0.85 -1.1 1 to 4 -
1
1 CA5-40
-
-
6 0.95 -1.1 1 to 4 inc. 2xN.C. max. 1 -
and
> 55 BC 9 - 22 - 00
} 1, 2, 3, 4 Uc 1 to 4 inc. 2xN.C. max. 1 -
< 70 BC 16 - 22 - 00 1 ± 30° Uc 1 to 4 - 1 CA5-40 -
< 55 BC 25 - 22 - 00
} 1, 2 0.85 -1.1
1 to 4 - 1 CA5-40 -
1±30°,3,4,6 0.95 -1.1
and
> 55
BC 25 - 22 - 00
} 1, 1 ± 30°
2, 3, 4 Uc 1 to 4 - 1 CA5-40 -
< 70
< 55
AE 45 - 22 - 00
AE 75 - 22 - 00
} 1, 1 ± 30°
2, 3, 4
0.85 - 1.1
1 to 6 inc. 2xN.C.max.
1
+1 to 2 CA5 1-pole
1
+1 to 2 CA5
6 0.95 - 1.1 Do not exceed 2xN.C. 1-pole
and
> 55 AE 45 - 22 - 00
AE 75 - 22 - 00
} 1, 1 ± 30°
2, 3, 4 Uc 1 to 6 inc. 2xN.C.max.
1
+1 to 2 CA5 1-pole
1
+1 to 2 CA5
< 70 Do not exceed 2xN.C. 1-pole
Note: For selection and use of surge suppressors (e.g. diode, varistor, etc.) with BC - contactors
see notes page 4/14.
● Technical Data ....................................................... page 2/38 ● Terminal Marking and Positioning ...................... Section 8
● Accessories ............................................................. Section 4 ● Dimensions ............................................................ Section 9
● General - Approvals ................................................ Section 7
3-pole Contactors
for 3-phase Capacitor Switching
A.C. Operated
General
The most common application is the parallel connection of 3-phase capacitors to a load or part of a circuit for power factor correction.
When connecting three-phase capacitors for compensation purposes, a distinction must be made between:
– Compensation via a single capacitor bank.
– Compensation via a stepped capacitor bank.
On energization, the capacitor is connected in parallel with the inductive network. A 3 to 15 kHz high frequency current, which may reach 160 In for
1 to 2 ms in the case of stepped bank compensation, flows through the oscillating circuit set up by the connection of the capacitor with the network.
The presence of harmonics and the supply voltage tolerance lead to a current, estimated to be 1.3 times the nominal current In of the capacitor,
continuously circulating in the circuit.
Taking into account the manufacturing tolerances, the exact power of a capacitor can reach 1.15 times its nominal power.
The contactor must therefore be sized to withstand:
– the short but high peak current during closing. See the Î peak current values in the following tables. Additional reactors may be used to limit
the peak inrush current.
– a permanent current IT able to reach 1.5 times the nominal current of the capacitor. This factor has been taken into account in the selection
tables below.
Short-circuit protection is generally ensured by gG fuses, sized 1.5 - 1.8 In of the capacitor.
Consult us for different conditions of use (higher inrush current, greater rate of harmonics).
Selection Table
Select the type of contactor in relation to the following characteristics:
- operational voltage - power in kvar - maximum contactor Î peak - ambient temperature close to contactor.
The capacitors must be fully discharged (maximum voltage at terminals ≤ 50 V) before being re-energized when the contactors are making.
UA 3-pole Contactors
for 3-phase Capacitor Switching
A.C. Operated
Ordering Details
Type Order code Mounted Weight
State coil to be completed with coil aux. cont. in kg
voltage: ■ voltage: ■ ■
Packing
See page 0/1 See page 0/1 1 piece
UA 3-pole contactors
SB 7597S4
Accessories
UA contactor accessories are the same as those of standard A contactors (see section 4).
UA 95-30-00
UA .. -R 3-pole Contactors
for 3-phase Capacitor Switching
A.C. Operated
Description
UA .. -R contactors are equipped with resistors and the relevant insertion contacts.
The insertion contacts make and break prior to the main poles (shifted operation about a few milliseconds).
Making sequence
– first step: the early-make insertion contacts switch-on the current to the capacitor via the damping resistors.
– second step: main poles are making.
The insertion contacts stay closed, ready to operate as early-breaking contacts for the next breaking sequence.
Breaking sequence
– first step: the insertion contacts operate as early-breaking ones and switch-off the resistances circuitry.
– second step: main poles are breaking the capacitor load.
Block Diagram
The capacitors must be discharged (maximum residual voltage at terminals <50 V) before being re-energized when the contactors are
making.
Ordering Details
Type Order code Mounted Weight
aux. cont. in kg
State coil to be completed
voltage: ■ with coil voltage ■ ■ Packing
(See page 0/1) (See page 0/1) 1 piece
UA 16-30-10-R ■ ■ ■10
1SBL 18 1023 R■ ■ 1 - 0.460
UA 26-30-10-R ■ ■ ■10
1SBL 24 1023 R■ ■ 1 - 0.710
UA 30-30-10-R ■ ■ ■10
1SBL 28 1023 R■ ■ 1 - 0.810
UA 50-30-00-R ■ ■ ■00
1SBL 35 1023 R■ ■ - - 1.350
UA 63-30-00-R ■ ■ ■00
1SBL 37 1023 R■ ■ - - 1.350
UA 75-30-00-R ■ ■ ■00
1SBL 41 1023 R■ ■ - - 1.350
UA .. -R 3-pole Contactors
for 3-phase Capacitor Switching
A.C. Operated
Technical Data
Durability 250 000 operating cycles at Ue <440 V
100 000 operating cycles at Ue >500 V
Operating frequency 240 cycles/h
– Main terminals IP 20 IP 10
– Coil terminals
– Auxiliary terminals
IP 20
IP 20
IP 20
IP 20 2
Connecting capacity UA 16..-R UA 26..-R UA30..-R UA 50..-R…UA 75..-R
UA 16-30-10-R Main conductors (poles)
– rigid solid (<4 mm2)
or rigid stranded (>6 mm2) min. - max. min. - max. min. - max. min. - max.
1 x mm2 1…4 1.5 … 6 2.5 …16 6 … 50
2 x mm2 – – 2.5…16 + 2.5…6 6…25 + 6…16
– flexible without cable end min. - max. min. - max. min. - max. min. - max.
1 x mm2 0.75 … 2.5 1…4 2.5 … 10 6 … 35
2 x mm2 – – 2.5…10 + 2.5…4 6…16 + 6…10
Accessories
UA 26-30-10-R UA .. - R contactor accessories are the same as those of standard A contactors (see section 4).
SB7820S2
UA 30-30-10-R
SB7821S2
UA 75-30-00-R
● Accessories, coils, contacts ................................. Section 4 ● Terminal Marking and Positionning ...................... Section 8
● Generals, Approvals ............................................... Section 7 ● Dimensions ............................................................. Section 9
Application
TBC and TAE contactors with a large coil voltage range are designed to operate in control circuits with large
voltage variations. Example: battery supply.
25 ........... 45 ■
5 ■
2 TAE 50 -30 -00 ■ 1SBL 35 9061 R ■ ■ 00 – – 100 50 15 22 25 30 1.20
36 ........... 65 ■
5 ■
4 TAE 50 -30 -11 ■ 1SBL 35 9061 R ■ ■ 11 1 1 100 50 15 22 25 30 1.24
42 ........... 78 ■
5 ■
8
TAE 75-30 -00 ■ 1SBL 41 9061 R ■ ■ 00 – – 125 75 22 37 40 40 1.20
50 ........... 90 ■
5 ■
5
TAE 75-30 -11 ■ 1SBL 41 9061 R ■ ■ 11 1 1 125 75 22 37 40 40 1.24
77 ......... 143 ■
6 ■
2
90 ......... 150 ■
6 ■
6 TAE 95-30 -00 ■ 1SFL 43 9061 R ■ ■ 00 – – 145 96 25 45 55 55 2.04
152 ........ 264 ■
6 ■
8 TAE 95-30 -11 ■ 1SFL 43 9061 R ■ ■ 11 1 1 145 96 25 45 55 55 2.07
Other voltages: please consult us. TAE 110-30 -00 ■ 1SFL 45 9061 R ■ ■ 00 – – 160 110 30 55 59 75 2.04
TAE 110-30 -11 ■ 1SFL 45 9061 R ■ ■ 11 1 1 160 110 30 55 59 75 2.07
4-pole contactor fitted with 2 N.O. main poles and 2 N.C. main poles
These contactors can be used for controlling either 2 separate circuits, i.e. 2 loads with 2 separate supplies,
or 1 circuit comprising 2 separate loads with 1 single supply (see diagram page 2/18).
When the contactor operates, there is no mechanical overlapping between the N.O. main poles and
N.C. main poles: BREAK before MAKE.
FRCTL 6991S5
These contactors are not suitable for a reversing starter or a star-delta starter or for controlling a single
load from 2 separate supplies.
TBC 16-22-00
TBC 9-22-00 ■ FPL 141 3561 R ■ 00 ■ – – 22 20 0.54
TBC 16-22-00 ■ FPL 181 3561 R ■ 00 ■ – – 28 25 0.54
TBC 25-22-00 ■ GJL 241 3561 R ■ 00 ■ – – 45 40 0.62
Coil Characteristics
No extra voltages applicable on the Uc min. - max. values of the Coil Voltage table, page 2/24.
– Coil consumption at Uc max. and θ = 20 °C:
- 9 W pull-in/holding for TBC type
- 450 W pull-in/ 7 W holding for TAE 50 and TAE 75 types
- 950 W pull-in/ 7 W holding for TAE 95 and TAE 110 types
– Replacement coils: please consult us (standard BC and AE contactor coils are not suitable for TBC and TAE
contactors).
Technical Data
Identical to standard BC and AE contactor data (see page 2 /38) except:
– Air temperature close to contactor: 55 °C max.
– Shock withstand in position 1 for contactors screwed on their support and without N.C. add-on aux. contact block.
1/2 sinusoidal shock for 11 ms: no change in contact position
Shock direction A B1 B2 C1 C2
Making TBC 15 g* 10 g 10 g 10 g 10 g
position TAE 20 g 10 g 15 g 20 g 20 g
Breaking TBC 10 g 5 g** 6 g*** 4 g 4g
position TAE 20 g 5g 15 g 20 g 20 g
Exceptions: *12g for TBC 30-30-00 ; **4g for TBC 16-22-00 ; ***5g for TBC 25-30-01
General
The AF contactors have the same appearance and same dimensions as the a.c. operated A contactors of equal
rating.They are fitted with an electronic coil interface. For a given coil, this interface allows the contactor to
accept a wide control voltage range in d.c. as well as in a.c., 50 or 60 Hz.
The current flow through the coil is a regulated d.c. current and is therefore independent from the control voltage
level and frequency.
Operating advantages :
– The device withstands large control voltage variations without nuisance reopening.
– Reduced holding coil consumption.
– Noiseless working: d.c. regulated coil.
– Pull-in and drop-out voltages are clearly defined.
SB7392S3
AF contactors comply with international standards IEC 947-1, 947-4-1 and European standards
EN 60 947-1, 60 947-4-1. Moreover, in environment 2, they meet the electromagnetic compatibility rules
AF 95-30 (EMC) : amendment A11 for IEC 947-1 and amendment 2 for IEC 947-4-1.
Using these materials in environment 1 may lead to radio-interferences requiring the use of additional mitigation
methods.
Here are the definitions given in the amendment A11 to standard EN 60 947-1.
Environment 1 : "Mainly relates to low-voltage public networks (see EN 50 082-1 article 5) such as residential,
commercial and light industrial locations/installations. Highly disturbing sources such as arc welders are not
covered by this environment".
Environment 2 : "Mainly relates to low-voltage non public or industrial networks/locations/installations
(see EN 50 082-2 article 4) including highly disturbing sources".
AF 95-30
Technical data
Type AF 45 … AF 75 AF 95, AF 110
Max. electrical switching frequency cycles/h 600 600
Coil consumption - pull-in a.c. VA 210 450
- pull-in d.c. (U min./U max.) W 135/210 290/450
- holding a.c. VA/W 5/1.5 11/3
- holding d.c. W 1.5 3
Operating time
Between coil energization and : - N.O. contact closing ms 20 … 45 25 … 40
- N.C. contact opening ms 17 … 40 22 … 37
Between coil de-energization and : - N.O. contact opening ms 40 … 70 60 … 120
- N.C. contact closing ms 45 … 75 65 … 125
These contactors can be used for controlling either 2 separate circuits, i.e. 2 loads with 2 separate supplies,
or 1 circuit comprising 2 separate loads with 1 single supply (see diagrams below).
When the contactor operates, there is no mechanical overlapping between the N.O. main poles
and N.C. main poles : Break before Make.
These contactors are not suitable for a reversing starter or a star-delta starter or for controlling a single
load from 2 separate supplies.
Coil voltages : ● 1 single supply and 2 separate loads ● 2 separate supplies and 2 separate loads
Rated control Code
voltage Uc :
d.c., 50 and 60 Hz a.c.
V .............. V ■ ■
58 ............ 92 6 4
90 .......... 130 6 5
100 .......... 160 6 6
150 .......... 240 6 7
Operating limits 0.85 ... 1.1 x Uc
Accessories (section 4)
AF 45 … AF 110 contactor accessories are the same as those of standard A contactors.
AF … contactor main contacts sets are the same as those of standard A contactors of equal rating ; see page 4/28.
Specific coils are required, see page 4/29.
General
Arc suppression is more difficult in d.c. than in a.c. To choose a contactor, it is necessary to know the current and
voltage to be broken as well as the L/R time constant of the power circuit to be controlled.
For your information, here are some typical time constant values:
– non inductive loads such as resistance furnaces: ......................... L / R ~ 1ms.
– shunt motors: ................................................................................ L / R ~ 2 ms.
– series motors: ............................................................................... L / R ~ 7.5 ms.
Remark: the addition of a resistor in parallel with an inductive winding makes arc suppression easier.
SB 7573S4
Types
GA75-10 - . . a.c. operated contactor
GA75-10-11
GAE 75-10 - . . d.c. operated contactor.
Description
GA and GAE contactors are fitted with arc chutes with permanent magnets specially designed for d.c. breaking.
The three contactor paths are arranged in series via two supplied and fitted insulated connections (25 mm2).
The GA75 and GAE75 are "single-pole" devices for which the connection polarities indicated next to the connection
terminals must be respected. Furthermore, they are marked 1L1 for the positive terminal and 2T1 for the negative
terminal.
Connection Diagrams
In d.c. circuits, the source to earth (or frame) connection mode is an important element.
Three modes are mainly used
A – insulated source, i.e. unearthed (or not connected to the frame).
B – source earthed via its central point.
C – source earthed via one of its outer poles.
Modes A and B do not impose any constraints with regard to the distribution of the contactor poles between the two
source/load connecting branches. Mode C requirements are therefore suitable for modes A and B.
For mode C, all the poles necessary for breaking must be installed in series between the load and the
unearthed (also not connected to the frame) source polarity.
We recommend this solution for all connection modes.
The above provisions relate to power circuit switching, the SCPD (Short-Circuit Protection Device) must comply with
protection rules.
SB 7574S4
Ordering Details
GAE 75-10-11 Rated insulation voltage Ui = 1000 V d.c. according to IEC 947-4-1 and EN 60 947-4-1.
Maximum switching frequencies: 300 operating cycles/h
Type Order code Mounted Max. rated operational current Weight
State coil to be completed with coil auxiliary DC-1 DC-3 DC-5 in kg
voltage:■ voltage:■ ■ contacts Ue ≤ 440 V Ue ≤ 600 V Ue ≤ 440 V Ue ≤ 220 V Ue ≤ 440 V
θ ≤ 40 °C θ ≤ 40 °C Packing
See page 0/1 See page 0/1 A A A A A 1 piece
Accessories (section 4)
Standard A and AE 40 - 75 contactor accessories are suitable for GA75 and GAE 75 contactors.
Coils are the standard coils for A and AE 50 - 75 contactors.
Contacts cannot be changed.
Description
Magnetically latched contactors are fitted with a double-winding coil and a built-in rectifier for both a.c. and d.c.
operation.
On closing, the first winding is energized by a voltage impulse. The contactor remains latched in closed position
owing to the permanent magnet.
For tripping, the effect of the permanent magnet is cancelled by the second winding.
The contactor can also be unlatched manually by exerting pressure on the side of the contactor where the
contact holder is located.
Ordering Details
2
SB 7593S4
Type Order code Mounted Rated operational Motor power AC-3 Weight
State coil to be completed with aux. cont. current 220 V 380 V in kg
voltage: ■ coil voltage: ■ ■ AC -1 AC-3 230 V 400 V 415 V 690 V
θ ≤ 40°C 400 V 240 V Packing
EHL 210-30-11
See table opposite See table opposite A A kW kW kW kW 1 piece
3-pole contactors
EHL 210-30-11 ■ SK 825 502 - ■ ■ 1 1 260 210 59 110 110 160 4.65
EHL 210-30-22 ■ SK 825 512 - ■ ■ 2 2 260 210 59 110 110 160 4.7
Coil Voltages: EHL 300-30-11 ■ SK 826 502 - ■ ■ 1 1 445 305 90 160 160 250 6.2
EHL 300-30-22 ■ SK 826 512 - ■ ■ 2 2 445 305 90 160 160 250 6.25
Rated control Code
voltage Uc : 4-pole contactors
d.c., 40 - 400 Hz a.c. EKL 150-40-11 ■ SK 824 542 - ■ ■ 1 1 250 145 45 75 75 110 4.35
V ............. V ■ ■ EKL 150-40-22 ■ SK 824 552 - ■ ■ 2 2 250 145 45 75 75 110 4.40
20 ............ 29 L B EKL 210-40-11 ■ SK 825 542 - ■ ■ 1 1 350 210 59 110 110 160 6.60
30 ............ 41 L C EKL 210-40-22 ■ SK 825 552 - ■ ■ 2 2 350 210 59 110 110 160 6.65
42 ............ 59 L D
59 ............ 82 L T
90 .......... 130 L E Winding Consumption
140 .......... 180 L V Consumption varies according to the Uc voltage value applied for each winding.
178 .......... 240 L F For a given voltage range from the table opposite, the lowest consumption corresponds to the lowest voltage
Operating limits 0.85 - 1.1 x Uc in the range and the highest consumption to the highest voltage in the range.
EHL 210 and EKL 150 EHL 300 and EKL 210
Making winding W 300 - 600 400 - 800
Breaking winding W 190 - 350 190 - 380
Wiring Diagram
SB 7596S4
EKL 150-40-11
Ordering Details
SK 823 023
Type Mounted Rated operational Motor power AC-3 Mechanical interlocking Weight
aux. cont. current AC-3 220 V 380 V for contactors in kg
to be completed with 400V 230 V 400 V 690 V
coil voltage code 240 V Packing
table opposite: ■ ■ A kW kW kW 1 piece
Ordering Details
Order code Mounted Rated operational Motor power AC-3 Latching for Weight
SK 825 025
Star-Delta Starting
75 75 132 132 160 160 20 EH 145 EH 145 A 110 T 200 DU TE 5 S BSD 145
90 90 160 160 200 250 20 EH 175 EH 175 EH 145 T 200 DU TE 5 S BSD 210
110 110 200 200 220 315 20 EH 210 EH 210 EH 175 T 450 DU TE 5 S BSD 210
132 160 250 250 355 450 20 EH 300 EH 300 EH 210 T 450 DU TE 5 S BSD 300
180 200 355 355 450 560 20 EH 370 EH 370 EH 260 T 450 DU TE 5 S BSD 550
250 250 450 475 600 700 20 EH 550 EH 550 EH 300 T 900 DU TE 5 S BSD 550
355 355 600 600 700 800 20 EH 700 EH 700 EH 550 T 900 DU TE 5 S (2) BSD 700 page
400 400 670 670 750 900 20 EH 800 EH 800 EH 550 T 900 DU TE 5 S (2) BSD 800 8/10
1) The setting current value is: motor nominal current x 0.58.
(2) Interpose an N contacteur relay between the TE 5 S timer and the coil of the delta contactor. (see diagram page 8/10)
● Contactors .................................. pages 2/12, 2/13 ● Accessories (timer, set of connections, etc.) ........................ Section 4
Ordering Details: ● Contactor Relays ................................... Section 3 ● Thermal O/L Relays .............................................................. Section 5
Type A9 A 12 A 16 A 26 A 30 A 40 A 45 A 50 A 63 A 75 A 95 A 110
Number of poles 3 or 4 3 3 or 4 3 or 4 3 3 4 3 or 4 3 3 or 4 3 3
Insulation Characteristics
Rated insulation voltage Ui
according to IEC 947-4-1 and VDE 0110 (Gr. C) V 1000
according to UL/CSA V 600
Rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp. 8 kV
Type EK 110 EH 145 EK 150 EH 175 EH 210 EK 175 EK 210 EH 260 EH 300 EH 370 EK 370 EH 550 EK 550 EH 700 EH 800
Number of poles 4 3 4 3 3 4 4 3 3 3 4 3 4 3 3
Insulation Characteristics
Ui
V 1000
V 600
Uimp. unless otherwise indicated: 8 kV
gG (gl) type fuses A 250 250 355 355 500 630 800 1000 1000
Rated short-time 1s A 1700 1800 2000 2300 3500 5500 5500 7000 7000
withstand 10 s A 900 1200 1680 1680 2400 5300 5300 6400 6400
current Icw 30 s A 600 700 1000 1000 1500 3700 3700 4500 4500
1 min A 450 550 800 800 1100 3000 3000 3500 3500
15 min A 210 250 320 320 500 1000 1000 1300 1300
Heat dissipation per pole W 10 13 14 18 35 40 60 60 60
W 3 5 6 9 15 15 25 25 28
(1) For the corresponding kW/hp/A values of 1500 r.p.m., 50Hz, 3-phase motors, refer to page 0/0.
(2) For the protection of motor starters against short circuits, see page 7/17.
Type A9 A 12 A 16 A 26 A 30 A 40 A 45 A 50 A 63 A 75 A 95 A 110
Number of poles 3 or 4 3 3 or 4 3 or 4 3 3 4 3 or 4 3 3 or 4 3 3
Mounting positions: Positions 1 to 5 - Ambient temperature ≤ 55°C and control voltage 0.85 - 1.1 Uc
(see diagram, p. 2/37) - Ambient temperature 55 - 70°C and control voltage equal to Uc
Position 6 - Ambient temperature ≤ 55°C and control voltage 0.95 - 1.1 Uc
- Ambient temperature > 55°C unauthorized
Operating altitude m ≤ 3000
Shock withstand 1/2 sinusoidal shock for 11 ms: no change in contact position
acc. to IEC 68-2-27
and EN 60068-2-27 Shock direction: A, C1, C2 : 20 g
Mounting position 1 B1 : 5g
(See page 2/37) B2 : 15 g
Nota: only on plate for A 95 and A 110
Fixing • on mounting rail acc. to IEC 715 and EN 50 022 acc. to IEC 715 acc. to IEC 715
35 x 7.5 mm 35 x 15 EN 50 022 and EN 50 023
35 x 15 mm 75 x 25 EN 50 023 75 x 25
• by screws (not supplied) 2xM4 2xM6
Connecting terminals – Main poles (+,-) pozidriv 2 screw M8 HC, M 8 hexagon
(delivered in open position) M 3.5 M4 M 5 with slotted screw head socket screw with
with cable clamp with 2x(5.6x6.5mm) with single connector single connector
clamp double connect. 13 x 10 mm 14 x 14 mm
– Coil terminals M 3.5 (+,-) pozidriv 2 screws with cable clamp
– Built-in aux. terminals (+,-) pozidriv 2 screw and cable clamp
M 3.5 M4 M 3.5
Connecting capacity
Main conductors (poles) min. - max. min.-max. min. - max. min. - max. min. - max.
Rigid solid (≤4 mm2) / rigid stranded (≥6 mm2) 1 x mm2 1-4 1.5 - 6 2.5 - 16 6 - 50 10 - 95
2 x mm2 1-4 1.5 -6 2.5 - 16 6 - 16 6 - 35
Rigid:
with connector (Cu cable)
with connector (AI/Cu cables)
with double connector (AI/Cu cables)
Flexible without cable end 1 x mm2 0.75 - 2.5 1 - 4(1) 2.5 - 10 6 - 35 10 - 70
2 x mm2 0.75 - 2.5 1 - 4(1) 2.5 - 10 6 - 16 6 - 35
Bars or lugs: max. width mm ≤ 8 10 30 with LW 110
(see section 4)
hole Ø mm > 3.7 4.2 6
Auxiliary conductors (built-in aux. terminals + coil terminals) min. - max.
Rigid solid 1 or 2 x mm2 1-4 0.75 - 2.5
Flexible without cable end 1 x mm2 0.75 - 2.5 (1) 0.75 - 2.5 1 - 2.5 0.75 - 2.5
2 x mm2 0.75 - 2.5 (1) 0.75 - 2.5 0.75 - 2.5 0.75 - 2.5
Earth screw
Degree of protection Protection against direct contact acc. to VDE 0106 - Part. 100
acc. to IEC 529, IEC 947-1 – Main terminals IP 20 IP 10
and EN 60529 – Coil terminals IP 20
– Auxiliary terminals IP 20
(1) 1 or 2 times 0.75 - 4mm2 but with 0.75 and 1 mm2 cable end.
Type EK 110 EH 145 EK 150 EH 175 EH 210 EK 175 EK 210 EH 260 EH 300 EH 370 EK 370 EH 550 EK 550 EH 700 EH 800
Number of poles 4 3 4 3 3 4 4 3 3 3 4 3 4 3 3
Air temperature
See section 7
2
close to °C – 25 to + 55 (0.85 - 1.1 Uc)
contactor °C – 40 to + 70 (1) (0.85 - 1.1 Uc)
°C – 50 to + 70
Climatic Withstand according to IEC 68-2-30
Shock withstand 1/2 sinusoidal shock for 15 ms: without change in contact position
in position 1 Contactors in making or breaking position
Shock direction: C1, C2, A : 10 g
B1 : 10 g
B2 : 10 g
Fixing
2 x M5 4 x M 6 2 x M 5 4xM6 4 x M 6 (2)
Connecting Flat type with screws and bolts
terminals
M6 M 10
Cable clamp with M 3.5 (+,-) pozidriv screws
Terminals protected against direct contact according to VDE 0106 - Part. 100
Connecting
capacity
mm ≤ 30 30 33 50 55 65 75
mm > 6 10 10 10 10 10 10 x 2
ms 7 - 15 (95 - 120(2)) 10 - 20
ms 10 - 18 (100 - 125 (2)) 13 - 23
(1) 50/60 Hz coils: voltage codes ■
8 ■
0 to ■
8 ■
8 and E ■ (see page 0/1) (2) 40 - 400 Hz coils with built-in rectifier (see page 0/1)
Type BC 9 BC 16 BC 18 BC 25 BC 30 AE 45 AE 50 AE 63 AE 75 AE 95 AE 110
Number of poles 3 or 4 3 or 4 3 3 or 4 3 4 3 or 4 3 3 or 4 3 3
Insulation Characteristics
Rated insulation voltage Ui
according to IEC 947-4-1 and VDE 0110 (Gr. C) V 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000
according to UL/CSA V 600 600 600 600 600
Rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp. 8 kV 8 kV 8 kV
Max. mechanical switching frequency cycles/h 6000 6000 3000 3600 3600
Max. electrical switching for AC-1 cycles/h 600 600 600 300 300
frequency for AC-3 cycles/h 1200 1200 600 300 300
for AC-2, AC-4 cycles/h 300 300 150 150 150
Electrical durability see page 2/60 see pages 2/55 - 2/59
Rated making capacity AC-3 according to IEC 947-4-1 10 x Ie / AC-3 10 x Ie / AC-3
Rated breaking capacity AC-3 according to IEC 947-4-1 8 x Ie / AC-3 8 x Ie / AC-3
Max. breaking capacity with cos ϕ = 0.45 at 440 V A 200 200 315 380 1300 1160
(cos ϕ = 0.35 for Ie > 100 A) at 690 V A 120 120 210 290 630 800
Short-circuit protection for contactors without
thermal O/L relay - Motor protection excluded (4)
Ue ≤ 500 V a.c. - gG (gl) type fuses A 25 32/35 40 50 63 80 100 125 160 160 200
Rated short-time withstand 1s A 200 280 280 350 400 1000 1000 1000 1000 1320 1320
current Icw 10 s A 90 130 130 200 250 650 650 650 650 800 800
at 40°C ambient temperature, in free air, 30 s A 50 70 70 110 150 370 370 370 370 500 500
from cold state 1 min A 40 50 50 90 120 250 250 250 250 350 350
15 min A 22 28 28 45 55 100 100 115 125 160 175
Heat dissipation per pole Ie /AC-1 W 0.55 1.5 1.80 2.4 2.2 2.5 5 6.5 7 6.5 7.5
Ie /AC-3 W 0.10 0.4 0.45 0.6 0.6 0.65 1.3 1.5 2 2.7 3.6
(1) For the corresponding kW/hp/A values of 1500 r.p.m., 50Hz, 3-phase motors, refer to page 0/0.
(2) 32 A at 240V (3) 7.5 kW at 240 V
(4) For the protection of motor starters against short circuits, see page 7/17.
Type EK 110 EH 145 EK 150 EH 175 EH 210 EK 175 EK 210 EH 260 EH 300 EH 370 EK 370 EH 550 EK 550 EH 700 EH 800
Number of poles 4 3 4 3 3 4 4 3 3 3 4 3 4 3 3
Insulation Characteristics
Ui
V 1000
V 600
Uimp. Unless otherwise indicated: 8 kV
gG (gl) type fuses A 250 250 355 355 500 630 800 1000 1000
Rated short-time 1s A 1700 1800 2000 2300 3500 5500 5500 7000 7000
withstand 10 s A 900 1200 1680 1680 2400 5300 5300 6400 6400
current Icw 30 s A 600 700 1000 1000 1500 3700 3700 4500 4500
1 min A 450 550 800 800 1100 3000 3000 3500 3500
15 min A 210 250 320 320 500 1000 1000 1300 1300
Heat dissipation per pole W 10 13 14 18 35 40 60 60 60
W 3 5 6 9 15 15 25 25 28
1) For the corresponding kW/hp/A values of 1500 r.p.m., 50Hz, 3-phase motors, refer to page 0/0.
(2) For the protection of motor starters against short circuits, see page 7/17.
Type BC 9 BC 16 BC 18 BC 25 BC 30 AE 45 AE 50 AE 63 AE 75 AE 95 AE 110
Number of poles 3 or 4 3 or 4 3 3 or 4 3 4 3 or 4 3 3 or 4 3 3
– without thermal O/L relay °C -40 to +55 (0.85 to 1.1 U ) / +55 to +70 (U ) -40 to +55 (0.85 to 1.1 U ) / +55 to +70 (U ) -25 to +70 (0.85 to 1.1U )
c c c c c
Shock withstand 1/2 sinusoidal shock for 11 ms: no change in contact position
acc. to IEC 68-2-27
and EN 60068-2-27 Shock direction: A, C1, C2 : 20 g
Mounting position 1 B1 : 5g
(see page 2/43) B2 : 15 g
Nota: only on plate for A 95 and A 110
Fixing • on mounting rail according to IEC 715 and EN 50 022 according to IEC 715 acc. to IEC 715
35 x 7.5 mm 35 x 15 EN 50 022 and EN 50 023
35 x 15 mm 75 x 25 EN 50 023 75 x 25
• by screws (not supplied) 2xM4 2xM6
Connecting terminals – Main poles (+,-) pozidriv 2 screw with cable clamp M8 HC, M8, hexagon
(delivered in open position) M 3.5 M4 M5 slotted screw head socket screw with
with single connector single connector
13 x 10 mm 14 x 14 mm
– Coil terminals M 3.5 (+,-) pozidriv 2 screw with cable clamp
– Built-in aux. terminals (+,-) pozidriv 2 screw with cable clamp
M 3.5 M4
Connecting capacity
Main conductors (poles) min. - max. min. - max. min. - max. min. - max. min. - max.
Rigid solid (≤ 4 mm2) / rigid stranded (≥ 6 mm2) 1 x mm2 1-4 1.5 - 6 2.5 -10 6 - 50 10 - 95
2 x mm2 1-4 1.5 - 6 2.5 -10 6 - 16 6 - 35
Rigid:
with connector (Cu cable)
with connector (AI/Cu cables)
with double connector (AI/Cu cables)
Flexible without cable end 1 x mm2 1 - 2.5 1.5 - 4 2.5- 6 6 - 35 10 - 70
2 x mm2 0.75 - 2.5 1.5 - 4 2.5-6 6 - 16 6 - 35
Bars or lugs: max. width mm ≤ 8 10 13 30 avec LW 110
(voir ch. 4)
hole Ø mm > 3.7 4 5 6
Auxiliary conductors (built-in auxiliary terminals + coil terminals) min. - max. min. - max.
Rigid solid 1 or 2 x mm2 1-4 0. 75 - 2.5
Flexible without cable end (1) 1 x mm2 1 - 2.5 min. - max.
2 x mm2 0.75 - 2.5 0.75 - 2.5
Earth screw
Degree of protection acc. to IEC 529, IEC 947-1 and EN 60529 Protection against direct contact according to VDE 0106 - Part. 100
– Main terminals IP 10 IP 10
– Coil terminals IP 20 IP 20
– Auxiliary terminals IP 10 IP 20
(1) Except auxiliary built into BC 25: 0.75 - 4 mm2
Type EK 110 EH 145 EK 150 EH 175 EH 210 EK 175 EK 210 EH 260 EH 300 EH 370 EK 370 EH 550 EK 550 EH 700 EH 800
Number of poles 4 3 4 3 3 4 4 3 3 3 4 3 4 3 3
Shock withstand 1/2 sinusoidal shock for 15 ms: no change in contact position
in position 1 Contactors in making or breaking position
Shock direction: C1, C2, A: 10 g
B1 : 10 g
B2 : 10 g
Fixing
2 x M5 4 x M 6 2 x M 5 4xM6 4 x M 6 (2)
Connecting Flat type with screws and bolts
terminals
M6 M 10
Cable clamps with M 3.5 pozidriv (+,-) screws
Terminals protected against direct contact according to VDE 0106 - Part. 100
Connecting
capacity
mm ≤ 30 30 33 50 55 65 75
mm > 6 10 10 10 10 10 10 x 2
ms 10 - 35
ms 13 - 38
General
Contactor choice criteria for control of lighting circuits are as follows:
– type, power rating and number of lamps
– connection mode
– current values on closing and in steady state
– power factor
– presence or not of correction capacitors
Lighting circuits
In a given circuit, the number and power rating of lamps are defined and cannot result in overload. Only short-circuit protection has to be provided.
gG fuses or modular circuit-breakers will be chosen for this purpose.
The lamps have very specific technical data, according to their construction type.
– Incandescent lamps have a very high current on closing: more than 15 times normal current.
They do not introduce a large phase displacement between current and voltage.
– Fluorescent tubes are equipped with a ballast whose purpose is two-fold: contribute to ignition and limit current to nominal value once steady state
is reached. This ballast is a reactor that considerably lowers the power factor. It may or may not be compensated.
Choice of contactors
The following tables indicate, for each contactor type, the maximum permissible number of lamps per phase. Air temperature, near the contactor,
must be limited to 55 °C.
Numbers are given for a 230 V voltage distributed between phase and neutral: single-phase (phase + neutral) or three-phase
(3 phases + neutral) distribution.
In the case of a three-phase supply without neutral, 230 V phase-to-phase, the permissible number of lamps per phase will be that given in the tables
multiplied by 0.58.
Example: 120 x100W/230V incandescent lamps - 400 V three-phase network with distributed neutral.
Calculate the number of lamps per phase: 120 : 3 = 40. On the 100 W line of the incandescent lamp table, contactor A12 is limited to
38 lamps per phase, you must thus select contactor A 16 which accepts up to 42 lamps per phase.
General
The arc switching on d.c. is more difficult than on a.c.
● For selecting a contactor it is essential to determine the current, the voltage and the L/R time constant of the controlled load.
● For information, typical time constant values are quoted hereafter: non inductive loads such as resistance furnaces (L/R 1 ms), inductive loads
such as shunt motors (L/R 2 ms) or series motors (L/R 7.5 ms).
● The addition of a resistor in parallel with an inductive winding helps in the elimination of the arcs.
● All the poles required for breaking must be connected in series between the load and the source polarity not linked to earth (or chassis).
Contactor Selection - After selection from the ratings quoted in the tables below, please refer to Ordering Details page 2/ 12…
– a.c. operated contactors Type A9 A 12 A 16 A 26 A 30 A 40 A 45 A 50 A 63 A 75 GA 75
– d.c. operated contactors Type BC 9 … BC30 see page 2/48 AE 45 AE 50 AE 63 AE 75 GAE 75
Utilization category DC-1, L/R ≤ 1 ms
≤ 72 V A 25 27 30 45 55 60 100 100 110 120 120
110 V A 10 15 20 – – – – – – – 120
A 829 D
220 V A – – – – – – – – – – 120
440 V A – – – – – – – – – – 100
600 V A – – – – – – – – – – 75
≤ 72 V A 25 27 30 45 55 60 100 100 110 120 –
A 830 D
≤ 72 V A 25 27 30 45 – – 70 100 – 120 –
110 V A 25 27 30 45 – – 70 100 – 120 –
A 832 D
220 V A – – – – – – – – – – 100
440 V A – – – – – – – – – – 85
≤ 72 V A 25 27 30 45 55 60 100 100 110 120 –
110 V A 25 27 30 45 55 60 100 100 110 120 –
A 830 D
220 V A 6 7 8 – – – – – – – –
≤ 72 V A 25 27 30 45 55 60 100 100 110 120 –
110 V A 25 27 30 45 55 60 100 100 110 120 –
220 V A 25 27 30 45 55 60 100 100 110 120 –
A 831 D
≤ 72 V A 25 27 30 45 – – 70 100 – 120 –
110 V A 25 27 30 45 – – 70 100 – 120 –
A 832 D
220 V A – – – – – – – – – – 85
440 V A – – – – – – – – – – 35
≤ 72 V A 25 27 30 45 55 60 100 100 110 120 –
A 830 D
110 V A 10 15 20 30 45 50 80 80 90 100 –
220 V A 4 4 4 – – – – – – – –
≤ 72 V A 25 27 30 45 55 60 100 100 110 120 –
110 V A 25 27 30 45 55 60 100 100 110 120 –
A 831 D
220 V A 9 12 16 25 30 40 50 50 63 75 –
≤ 72 V A 25 27 30 45 – – 70 100 – 120 –
110 V A 25 27 30 45 – – 70 100 – 120 –
A 832 D
220 V A 10 15 20 30 – – 70 70 – 100 –
440 V A 4 4 4 – – – – – – – –
Technical data
● The tables indicate for the standard contactors the Ie max. operating currents depending on: the utilization category (i.e. L/R) DC-1, DC-3,
DC-5 as defined in the IEC 947-4-1 publication (see section 7 for more details), the operating voltage Ue and the pole coupling details.
Ampere values quoted in the tables below are valid for a –25 … +70 °C temperature close to the contactors, as long as the AC-1 Ampere values
(see page 2/32) for the corresponding ambient temperature are not exceeded.
● Max. switching frequency: 300 ops/h.
● For series connection of the poles, use connecting strips LP and LH described in section 4.
● For switching higher d.c. ratings, we recommend the use of bar mounted contactors, R series (63… 2000 A).
● Accessories, see section 4.
a.c.operated Type A 95 A 110 EK 110 EH 145 EK 150 EH 175 EH 210 EK 175 EK 210 EH 260 EH 300 EK 370 EH 550 EH 700 EH 800 2
d.c.operated Type AE 95 AE 110 EK 110 EH 145 EK 150 EH 175 EH 210 EK 175 EK 210 EH 260 EH 300 EK 370 EH 550 EH 700 EH 800
≤ 72 V A 145 160 200 200 200 260 300 300 300 400 445 550 800 1000 1000
110 V A 145 160 200 200 200 260 300 300 300 400 445 550 800 1000 1000
220 V A – – 200 200 200 260 300 300 300 400 445 550 800 1000 1000
≤ 72 V A 145 160 200 200 200 260 300 300 300 400 445 550 800 1000 1000
110 V A 145 160 200 200 200 260 300 300 300 400 445 550 800 1000 1000
220 V A 145 160 200 200 200 260 300 300 300 400 445 550 800 1000 1000
440 V A – – – – – 170 210 210 210 270 300 450 650 800 800
600 V A – – – – – – – – – – – 450 650 800 800
≤ 72 V A – – 200 – 200 – – 260 300 – – – – – –
110 V A – – 200 – 200 – – 260 300 – – – – – –
220 V A – – 200 – 200 – – 260 300 – – – – – –
440 V A – – 200 – 200 – – 260 300 – – – – – –
600 V A – – – – – – – 260 300 – – – – – –
Utilization category DC-3, L/R ≤ 2 ms
≤ 72 V A 96 110 120 145 145 175 210 210 210 260 305 370 550 700 700
≤ 72 V A 96 110 135 135 135 170 210 210 210 260 300 450 650 800 800
110 V A 96 110 135 135 135 170 210 210 210 260 300 450 650 800 800
220 V A – – 135 135 135 170 210 210 210 260 300 450 650 800 800
≤ 72 V A 96 110 135 135 135 170 210 210 210 260 300 450 650 800 800
110 V A 96 110 135 135 135 170 210 210 210 260 300 450 650 800 800
220 V A 96 110 135 135 135 170 210 210 210 260 300 450 650 800 800
440 V A – – – – – 170 210 210 210 260 300 450 650 800 800
600 V A – – – – – – – – – – – 450 650 800 800
≤ 72 V A – – 135 – 135 – – 170 210 – – – – – –
110 V A – – 135 – 135 – – 170 210 – – – – – –
220 V A – – 135 – 135 – – 170 210 – – – – – –
440 V A – – 135 – 135 – – 170 210 – – – – – –
600 V A – – – – – – – 170 210 – – – – – –
Utilization category DC-5, L/R ≤ 7.5 ms
≤ 72 V A 96 110 135 135 135 170 210 210 210 260 300 450 650 800 800
110 V A 96 110 135 135 135 170 210 210 210 260 300 450 650 800 800
220 V A – – 135 135 135 170 210 210 210 260 300 450 650 800 800
≤ 72 V A 96 110 135 135 135 170 210 210 210 260 300 450 650 800 800
110 V A 96 110 135 135 135 170 210 210 210 260 300 450 650 800 800
220 V A 96 110 135 135 135 170 210 210 210 260 300 450 650 800 800
440 V A – – – – – 170 210 210 210 260 300 450 650 800 800
600 V A – – – – – – – – – – – 450 650 800 800
≤ 72 V A – – 135 – 135 – – 170 210 – – – – – –
110 V A – – 135 – 135 – – 170 210 – – – – – –
220 V A – – 135 – 135 – – 170 210 – – – – – –
440 V A – – 135 – 135 – – 170 210 – – – – – –
600 V A – – – – – – – 170 210 – – – – – –
General
The arc switching on d.c. is more difficult than on a.c.
● For selecting a contactor it is essential to determine the current, the voltage and the L/R time constant of the controlled load.
● For information, typical time constant values are quoted hereafter: non inductive loads such as resistance furnaces (L/R 1 ms), inductive loads
such as shunt motors (L/R 2 ms) or series motors (L/R 7.5 ms).
The addition of a resistor in parallel with an inductive winding helps in the elimination of the arcs.
● All the poles required for breaking must be connected in series between the load and the source polarity not linked to earth (or chassis).
Technical data
● The tables indicate for the standard contactors the Ie max. operating currents depending on: the utilization category (i.e. L/R) DC-1, DC-3,
DC-5 as defined in the IEC 947-4-1 publication (see section 7 for more details), the operating voltage Ue and the pole coupling details.
Ampere values quoted in the tables below are valid for a –25 … +70 °C temperature close to the contactors, as long as the AC-1 Ampere values
(see page 2/38) for the corresponding ambient temperature are not exceeded.
● Max. switching frequency: 300 ops/h.
● For series connection of the poles, use connecting strips LP and LH described in section 4.
● For switching higher d.c. ratings, we recommend the use of bar mounted contactors, R series (63… 2000 A).
Contactor Selection - After selection from the ratings quoted in the tables below, please refer to Ordering Details pages 2/ 14, 2/17.
– d.c. operated contactors Type BC 9 BC 16 BC 25 BC 30
Utilization category DC-1, L/R ≤ 1 ms
≤ 72 V A 22 28 45 55
110 V A 5 10 – –
A 829 D
≤ 72 V A 22 28 45 55
110 V A 22 28 45 55
A 830 D
220 V A 5 10 – –
≤ 72 V A 22 28 45 55
A 831 D
110 V A 22 28 45 55
220 V A 22 28 45 55
≤ 72 V A 22 28 45 –
110 V A 22 28 45 –
A 832 D
220 V A 22 28 45 –
440 V A 5 10 – –
110 V A 2 2 – –
≤ 72 V A 9 18 25 30
110 V A 8 16 20 30
A 830 D
220 V A 2 2 – –
≤ 72 V A 10 16 25 30
110 V A 10 16 25 30
A 831 D
220 V A 10 10 15 25
≤ 72 V A 10 16 25 –
110 V A 10 16 25 –
A 832 D
220 V A 10 16 20 –
440 V A 2 2 – –
Switching the primary of 3-phase transformers, on energization of the transformer, is characterized by high current peaks due to the magnetization
phenomena. These current peaks are roughly 20 to 30 times the transformer nominal current.
The tables below show the operational powers for a maximum switching frequency of 60 operating cycles per hour.
A.C. operated contactors Type A 110 EH 145 EH 175 EH 210 EH 260 EH 300 EH 370 EH 550 EH 700 EH 800
D.C. operated contactors Type AE 110 EH 145 EH 175 EH 210 EH 260 EH 300 EH 370 EH 550 EH 700 EH 800
Control of three-phase
slip-ring motors
General
Three kinds of contactor are used to control three-phase slip-ring motors: the stator contactor, the acceleration contactor(s) and the rotor short-
circuit contactor. Refer to the diagram opposite.
The selection tables below concern complete smooth starting, excluding specific cases, such as: intermittent operation, regenerative current,
controlled slipping, etc. for which you need to consult our specialised departments.
The starting and breaking technical data for slip-ring motors are defined in standard IEC 947-4-1 in the AC-2 utilization category.
Operating cycle
The load factor is defined by the equation: L. F. (%) = x 100
Cycle time (Operating cycle + Rest cycle)
Stator contactor
Closing of the starting current, conditioned by the value of the rotor resistances: it may reach 1.5 to 4 times motor rated operational current.
Breaking of the rated operational current, or of the starting current, with possible regenerative current.
The following table gives the permissible values of the rated operational stator current, as a function of load factor.
Maximum switching frequency of 600 cycles an hour and temperature of 55 °C maximum near the contactor.
Acceleration contactors
Number of cycles an hour 1 3 6 12 20 30 60 120
The sizing of these contactors is based on the rated
operational current AC-1 (see p. 2/32 and 2/33) that we Current flow time per cycle Factors applicable to Ie /AC-1
recall below for the maximum ambient temperature of 5s 5.2 4.9 4.7 4.3 4.0 3.7 3.4 2.8
55 °C.
10 s 3.8 3.6 3.4 3.1 3.0 2.8 2.6 2.2
Delta connection of these contactors is considered: reduce
currents by 35% if star connection is used. 20 s 2.8 2.7 2.6 2.5 2.4 2.2 2.0 1.6
The table opposite lists the factors to be applied to 30 s 2.4 2.3 2.2 2.1 2.1 1.9 1.7 -
current AC-1 of the contactors in order to obtain the
40 s 2.2 2.1 2.0 1.9 1.9 1.7 1.5 -
permissible limit value of the motor rated operational rotor
current. This table takes into account the number of cycles 60 s 1.9 1.8 1.8 1.7 1.7 1.5 - -
an hour (without inching) and the current flow time per
cycle, in the contactor.
Load factor 15 % A 45 58 70 105 112 125 160 210 245 290 330
25 % A 40 51 63 93 102 115 140 180 215 260 300
40 % A 35 42 54 80 87 95 120 155 185 230 260
60 % A 30 39 47 70 76 86 110 140 163 200 230
S7 acc. to IEC 34-1:
periodical continuous
duty with electrical braking A 28 35 40 58 72 85 100 130 152 170 200
Rated operational rotor voltage:
● Maximum values for starting and breaking V 1100 (1320 if star connection) 2200 (2600)
● Maximum values for starting and
electrical braking V 550 (600 if star connection) 690 (730)
Control of three-phase
slip-ring motors
Contactors with a.c. coil EH 145 EH 175 EH 210 EH 260 EH 300 EH 370 EH 550 EH 700 EH 800
Load factor 15 % A 335 360 425 530 625 850 1130 1400 1500
25 % A 270 300 350 440 515 680 930 1200 1250
40 % A 215 250 300 370 430 580 780 980 1050
60 % A 180 220 255 315 370 480 670 850 900
S7 acc. to IEC 34-1:
periodical continuous duty
with electrical braking A 145 175 210 260 305 400 550 700 750
Load factor 15 % A 480 580 660 810 950 1200 1600 2050 2200
25 % A 420 530 600 710 830 1050 1400 1800 2000
40 % A 370 460 520 620 720 950 1250 1500 1700
60 % A 330 400 460 560 650 810 1100 1400 1500
S7 acc. to IEC 34-1:
periodical continuous duty
with electrical braking A 290 350 400 470 550 700 950 1200 1300
Rated operational rotor voltage:
● Maximum values for starting and breaking V 2200 (2600 if star connection) 3000 (3600) 4000 (4800 if star connection)
● Maximum values for starting and
electrical braking V 690 (730 if star connection) 690 (730) 690 (730 if star connection)
Under certain conditions the excessive length of the control circuit conductors may prevent the contactor from
carrying out closing and opening orders.
– no closing: due to excessive voltage drop (in a.c. or d.c.).
– no opening: due to excessive capacitance (in a.c.).
1st case: closing (contactor with a.c. or d.c. fed control circuit).
The voltage drop is due to the inrush current (inrush power) and to the resistance of the control circuit
conductors.
The table and graph below can be used to determine the single length of line feeders (distance between the
control device and the contactor coil) in relation to:
● the inrush coil consumption.
● the supply voltage.
● the connecting wire cross-sectional area.
The graph has been drawn for a max. line voltage drop of 5%.
Inrush coil consumption (average value)
A.C. control circuit 50 Hz D.C. control circuit
N Contactor relays KC Contactor relays
4 and 8-pole 70 VA 4 and 8-pole 7W
Contactors: Contactors:
A 9, 12, 16 70 VA BC 9, 16, 18, 25, 30 7W
A 26, 30, 40 120 VA
A 45, 50, 63, 75 180 VA AE 45, 50, 63, 75 200 W
A 95, 110 450 VA AE 95, 110 400 W
EH 145 430 VA EH 145 330 W
EH 175, 210, EK 110, 150 800 VA EH 175, 210, EK 110, 150 500 W
EH 260, 300, EK 175, 210 1100 VA EH 260, 300, EK 175, 210 630 W
EH 370, 550 2600 VA EH 370, 550 800 W
EH 700, 800, EK 370, 550 3500 VA EH 700, 800, EK 370, 550 1100 W
Permissible single length for the control circuit conductors on contactor closing:
Depending on the coil inrush power consumption, on the supply voltage and on the control circuit conductor cross-sectional area.
Example:
A 9 contactor
Coil voltage: 230 V 50 Hz, contactor coil inrush power consumption: 70 VA,
control circuit conductor cross-sectional area: Cu 1.5 mm2. Max. permissible length: 2000 m.
The table and graph below can be used to determine the single length of line feeders (distance between the
control device and the contactor coil) in relation to:
Single control line length
● the coil holding consumption VA.
● the supply voltage.
● the capacity in µF/km (depending on the control layout).
Wiring diagrams A and B oppposite show two supply and coil control wiring examples.
Coil holding consumption (average value)
For a.c. control circuit 50Hz For a.c. control circuit 50Hz
Wiring diagram B
Via momentary pushbutton plus
Contactor relays: Contactors:
hold-in contact and 3-core cable N, 4-pole 8 VA A 95, 110 28 VA
(with a capacity of 2 x 0.2 = 0.4 µF /km,
for example).
N, 8-pole 8 VA EH 145 30 VA
Contactors: EH 175, 210, EK 110, 150 44 VA
A 9, 12, 16 8 VA EH 260, 300, EK 175, 210 52 VA
A 26, 30, 40 12 VA EH 370, 550 90 VA
A 45, 50, 63, 75 18 VA EH 700, 800, EK 370, 550 125 VA
Permissible single length for the control circuit conductors on contactor opening:
Depending on the coil holding power consumption, on the supply voltage and on the control circuit conductor capacity.
Examples:
A 16 contactor A 50 contactor
Coil voltage Uc = 500V, 50Hz, 8 VA contactor coil holding consumption, Coil voltage Uc = 230V, 50Hz, 18 VA contactor coil holding consumption,
control type: diagram A, via maintained pushbutton, and 2-core cable with control type: diagram B via momentary pushbutton, hold-in contact and
a capacity of 0.2 µF/km. 3-core cable with a capacity of 2 x 0.2 µF/km = 0.4 µF/km.
Max. permissible length: 60 m. Max. permissible length: 380 m.
EK175, EK210
EK370, EK550
} a.c. and d.c.
Operated
1.6 2.2 2.8
Example:
A 9 contactor (intermittent duty, resistive load)
Rated operational current Ie / AC-1 at 55°C (page 2/32) 22 A
Switching frequency 2 operations/h
Current flow time per cycle 20 s
Factor to be applied to the current Ie / AC-1 2.7
Permissible current: 2.7 x 22 = 59 A
General
Utilization categories determine the current making and breaking conditions relating to the characteristics of the loads to be controlled by the
contactors. International standard IEC 947-4-1 and European standard EN 60 947-4-1 are the standards to be referred to.
If Ic is the current to be broken by the contactor and Ie the rated operational current normally drawn by the load, then:
Electrical durability forecast and contactor selection for mixed duty motor control: AC-3 (Ic = Ie) type switching off while "motor running"
and, occasionally, AC-4 (Ic = 6 x Ie) type switching off while "motor accelerating" .
● Note the characteristics of the motor to be controlled:
– Operational voltage ............................................................................ Ue
– Current normally drawn while "motor running" ................................... Ie - Ue / Ie / kW relation for motors, see page 0/0.
– Breaking current for AC-3 ................................................................... Ic = Ie
– Breaking current for AC-4 while "motor accelerating" ........................ Ic = 6 x Ie
– Percentage of AC-4 operations .......................................................... K (on the basis of the total number of operating cycles)
● Define the total number of operating cycles N required.
● Note the smallest contactor rating compatible for AC-3 (Ue / Ie) on pages 2/32 and 2/33.
● For the selected contactor make a note of the following in relation to the voltage using diagram AC-4 page 2/58 or 2/59:
– The number of operating cycles A for Ic = Ie
– The number of operating cycles B for Ic = 6 x Ie
● Calculate the estimated number of cycles N' (N' is always below A)
A
N' =
1 + 0.01 K (A/B - 1)
● If N' is too low in relation to the target N, calculate the estimated number of cycles for a higher contactor rating.
Example:
Ic/ AC-1 = 24 A – Electrical durability required = 2 million operations.
Using the AC-1 curves above select the A 30 contactor at intersection " " (24A / 2 million operations).
Switching cage motors: starting and switching off running motors. The breaking current Ic for AC-3 is equal to the rated operational current Ie
(Ie = motor full load current).
Electrical Durability for Utilization Category AC-3 - Ue < 440 V - Ambient Temperature < 55 °C
Electrical Durability for Utilization Category AC-3 - 440 V < Ue < 690 V - Ambient Temperature < 55 °C
Example:
Motor power 40 kW for AC-3 - Ue = 400 V utilization – Electrical durability required = 1.5 million operations.
As stated on the cover page 0/0: 40 kW, 400 V corresponds to Ie = 79 A. Select the A 110 contactor at intersection " " (79A/1.5 million
operations) on the curves (AC-3 - Ue < 440 V).
Electrical Durability for Utilization Category AC-4 - Ue < 440 V - Ambient Temperature < 55 °C
Maximum number of AC-4 operations: 300 per hour for A 9 - EH 145
120 per hour for EH 175 - EH 800.
Switching cage motors: starting, reverse operation and step-by-step operation. The breaking current Ic is equal to 6 x Ie, keeping in mind that Ie is
the motor rated operational current (Ie = motor full-load current).
Example:
Motor power 45 kW for AC-4 - Ue = 400 V utilization – Electrical durability required = 0.2 million operations.
As stated on cover page 0/0: 45 kW, 400 V corresponds to Ie = 85 A.
For AC-4: Ic = 6 x Ie = 510 A - Select the EH 260 contactor at intersection " " (510A/0.2 million operations) on the curves (AC-4 - Ue < 440 V).
Electrical Durability for Utilization Category AC-4 - 440 V < Ue < 690 V - Ambient Temperature < 55 °C
Maximum number of AC-4 operations: 300 per hour for A 9 - EH 145
120 per hour for EH 175 - EH 800.
Switching cage motors: starting, reverse operation and step-by-step operation. The breaking current Ic is equal to 6 x Ie, keeping in mind that Ie is
the motor rated operational current (Ie = motor full load current).
Example:
Motor power 59 kW for AC-4 - Ue = 600 V utilization – Electrical durability required = 0.04 million operations.
As stated on cover page 0/0: 59 kW, 600 V corresponds to Ie = 71.1 A.
For AC-4: Ic = 6 x Ie = 426.6 A - Select the EH 145 contactor at intersection " " (427A/0.04 million operations) on the curves
(AC-4 - 440 V < Ue < 690 V).
Example:
Ic/ AC-1 = 21 A – Electrical durability required = 1.1 million operations.
Using the AC-1 curves above select the BC 16 contactor at intersection " " (21A / 1.1 million operations).
Electrical Durability for Utilization Category AC-3 - Ue < 500 V. Ambient Temperature < 55 °C
Switching cage motors: starting and switching off running motors. The breaking current Ic for AC-3 is equal to the rated operational current Ie
(Ie = motor full load current).
Example:
Motor power 9 kW for AC-3 - Ue = 400 V utilization – Electrical durability required = 2.3 million operations.
As stated on the cover page 0/0: 9 kW, 400 V corresponds to Ie = 18.3 A. Select the BC 25 contactor at intersection " " (18.3 A/2.3 million
operations) on the curves (AC-3 - Ue < 500 V).
Contents
Technical Data
Additional Information
Application
N contactor relays are used for switching auxiliary circuits and control circuits.
Description
● a.c. operated with laminated magnetic circuit.
● Alone or fitted with a 4-pole CA 5 auxiliary contact block, these devices offer "positive safety" between their auxiliary contacts.
Holes for screw fixing (screws not supplied). Location of surge suppressors
Distances between holes according to
EN 50 002. A2 z
A 21 2 0 - 2 3 0 V 5V 06 0H H z
2 3 0 - 2 4R08 0
N Contactor Relays
Accessories
RV 5
RC 5-1
Surge
suppressor
CAL 5-11
NC
Side-mounted 2-pole
01 auxiliary contact block
02
NC
01
NC
N 22 E
N 31 E
3
N 40 E
Contactor
Relay
NC
E0573DG
02
VM 5-1
VE 5-1
Interlock unit
RV 5
RC 5-1
E0574DG
Surge
suppressor
CAL 5-11
Side-mounted 2-pole
auxiliary contact block
NC
01
02
NC
01
NC N 44 E
N 53 E
N 62 E
N 71 E
N 80 E
5-1
VM Contactor Relay
VM 5-1
VE 5-1
NC
02
Interlock unit
N 44 E
N 53 E
N 62 E
N 71 E
N 80 E
CAL 5-11 Contactor Relay
Side-mounted 2-pole
auxiliary contact block
Application
KC and TKC contactor relays are used for switching auxiliary circuits and control circuits.
Description
● Magnetic circuit variants:
– KC types: d.c. operated with solid magnetic circuits.
– TKC types: d.c. operated with solid magnetic circuit and large coil voltage range.
● Alone or fitted with a 4-pole CA 5 auxiliary contact block, these devices offer "positive safety" between their auxiliary contacts.
V DC
24
Quick fixing on 35 x 7.5 mm or 35 x 15 mm Terminal marking according to
mounting rail according to IEC 715 and A1 IEC 947-5-1 and EN 50 011.
EN 50 022.
33 43
13 6-
23 7-
8-
5-
Holes for screw fixing (screws not supplied). Location of function marker
Distances between holes according to and surge suppressor.
EN 50 002. KC 40 E
should be tightened).
Screwdriver guidance for all screws makes 7-
8-
44
it possible to use motorized screwdrivers. 6- 24 34
5-
All terminals provide protection against 14
accidental direct contact with live parts All terminal screws:
according to VDE 0106 - Part. 100. M 3.5, pozidriv (+,-) N° 2
● Ordering Details ........................................................ pages 3/6 and 3/7 ● General - Approvals ............................................................... Section 7
● Technical Data ........................................................... pages 3/7 and 3/8 ● Terminal Marking and Positioning ....................................... Section 8
● Accessories ............................................................................. Section 4 ● Dimensions ............................................................................. Section 9
VBC 30
3
Interlock unit KC 22 E
spacer KC 31 E
KC 40 E
Contactor Relay
VBC 30
Interlock unit
E0571DG
KC 22 E
KC 31 E
KC 40 E
Contactor Relay
TP 40 DA
TP 180 DA
CA 5...
TP 40 IA
Front-mounted 4-pole
TP 180 IA
auxiliary contact block
Pneumatic timer
RV-BC 6
RT 7
Surge suppressor*
E0572DG
KC 44 E
KC 62 E
Contactor Relay
* For selection and use of surge suppressors, see notes page 4/14.
Ordering Details
Type Order code Number of contacts Weight
1st stack 2nd stack in kg
State coil to completed with coil
voltage: ■ voltage code: ■■ Packing
See page 0/1 See page 0/1 1 piece
SB 7362S2
ABB
mm mm Operating cycles/h
ABB ABB
2 20 < 20 1200 Pos. 3, 4
D
5 20 < 55 1200
SB 6514S3
E0201D1
ABB
Pos.1, 2, 5, 6
KC 40 E
KC 31 E
} 1, 3, 4
1±30°, 2, 6
0.85-1.1
0.95-1.1
1
1
to
to
4
4
1**
1**
1
1
5* 0.85-1.1 1 to 4 inc. 2 x N.C. max. 1 TP..DA
ABB
< 55
ABB
Pos. 3
KC 22 E
} 1, 2, 3, 4
1 ± 30°
0.85-1.1
0.85-1.1
1 to 4 inc. 2 x N.C. max.
1 to 4 -
1
1 CA5-40
-
-
6 0.95-1.1 1 to 4 inc. 2 x N.C. max. 1 -
ABB
Pos. 2
( 55 °C) > 55
KC 40 E
} 1, 1±30°, 2, 3, 4 Uc 1 to 4 1** 1
KC 31 E 5* Uc 1 to 4 inc. 2 x N.C. max. 1 TP..DA
and
Pos. 4
≤ 70 KC 22 E
} 1, 2, 3, 4 Uc 1 to 4 inc. 2 x N.C. max. 1 -
1 ± 30° Uc 1 to 4 - 1 CA5-40 -
* In position 5, do not use the RD7 diode unit: consult us. Maximum operating voltage: Ue < 440 V a.c.
**The CA5-04 four-pole auxiliary contact block (4 x N.C. contacts) can be used on those type.
Note: For selection and use of surge suppressors (e.g. diode, varistor, etc.), see notes page 4/14.
E0203DG1
Pos. 5 Pos. 6 ( 55 °C) ● Accessories ........................................................... Section 4 ● Terminal Marking and Positioning ...................... Section 8
except KC 22 E ● General - Approvals .............................................. Section 7 ● Dimensions ............................................................ Section 9
Application
TKC contactor relays with a large coil voltage range have been designed to operate in control circuits
characterized by large variations in voltage supply. Example: battery supply.
Ordering Details
Type Order code Number of contacts Weight
State coil to be completed with coil 1st stack 2nd stack in kg
FRCTL 6524S5
9 .......... 15 5 .. 6
TKC44 E ■
TKC62 E ■
FPH 142 3061 R ■ 44 ■
FPH 142 3061 R ■ 62 ■
4
4
–
–
–
2
4
2
0.600
0.600
3
17 .......... 32 5 .. 1
25 .......... 45 5 .. 2
36 .......... 65 5 .. 4 Coil Characteristics
50 .......... 90 5 .. 5
77 ........ 143 6 .. 2 ! No extra tolerances applicable to the Uc min. ... max. values quoted in table opposite.
90 ........ 150 6 .. 6 – Coil consumption at Uc max. θ = 20 °C: 9 W pull-in/holding
120 ........ 167 6 .. 3 – Replacement coils: consult us (standard coils used on KC contactor relays are not suitable for TKC contactor
Other voltages: consult us. relays).
ABB
d D Ambient temp. Max. switching frequency
ABB ABB
mm mm °C Operating cycles/h
Pos. 3, 4
D
2 20 < 20 1200
5 20 < 55 1200
E0201D2
ABB
Pos.1
Technical Characteristics
FRCTL 6522S2
Shock direction A B1 B2 C1 C2
Making position 15 g 10 g 10 g 10 g 10 g ABB
A A B1 B2
Breaking position 10 g 5 g* 6 g** 4g 4g
Exceptions: *4g for TKC 22 ; **5g for TKC 31 ; Consult us for TKC 44
Mounting positions:
E0202D
Add-on Accessories
Contactor Max. number of auxiliary contact blocks Timer Mechanical Function
ABB relays CA5-10 CA5-01 CA5-40 CA5-31 CA5-22 CA5-04 TP interlock marker
Pos. 1, 3 or 4
TKC 40-E 4 2 1 1 1 – – VBC 30 BA 5-50
Pos. 1, 3 or 4
TKC 31-E 4 1 1 1 – – – VBC 30 BA 5-50
Pos. 1, 3 or 4
TKC 22-E 4 – 1 – – – – VBC 30 BA 5-50
ABB
Pos. 1 ±30°
TKC - all types – – – – – – – VBC 30 BA 5-50
For selection and use of surge suppressors (e.g. diodes, varistors, etc.) with TKC contactor relays, see notes page 4/14.
ABB
Insulation Characteristics
Rated insulation voltage Ui
acc. to IEC 947-5-1 and VDE 0110 (Gr. C) V 690
acc. to UL/CSA V 600
Rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp
acc. to IEC 947-5-1 kV 8
(see below) B2 : 15 g
C2
2
8-p s
blocks in relation to ole
KC
the breaking current Ic. 1
typ
es
These curves have
been drawn for 0.5
0.2
40...60 Hz.
E0200D1
0.1
0.02 0.05 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.5 1 2 3 4 5 6 10
Notes
Contents
Main Accessories for Contactors and Contactor Relays: Compatibility ................................ 4/3
Auxiliary Contact Blocks ....................................................................................................... 4/4
TE5S Electronic Timer for Star-Delta Starters ...................................................................... 4/6
TP Pneumatic Timer Blocks .................................................................................................. 4/8
Mechanical Interlock Units/ Mechanical and Electrical Interlock Units ............................... 4/10
Mechanical Latching Units .................................................................................................. 4/12
Surge Suppressors for Contactor Coils .............................................................................. 4/14
RA 30 and RA 5 Interface Relays ....................................................................................... 4/16 4
Connection Auxiliaries for Control Leads- Impulse Contact Blocks .................................... 4/18
Lamp Holder - Fuse Holder - Function Markers .................................................................. 4/19
Terminal Connecting Strips ................................................................................................. 4/20
Connectors - Flat Pin Terminal Blocks ................................................................................ 4/21
Terminal Accessories .......................................................................................................... 4/22
Terminal Shrouds ................................................................................................................ 4/23
Connection Sets .................................................................................................................. 4/24
Plates for: EH 145 - EH 800 3-pole Contactors
EK 110 - EK 550 4-pole Contactors ................................................................... 4/26
Main Contact Sets - Arc Chutes .......................................................................................... 4/28
Contactor Operating Coils ................................................................................................... 4/29
NC
01
02
NC
01
NC
NC
02
VM 5 ...
VE 5 ...
Interlock unit
E0566DG
CA 5...
Front-mounted
CAL 5-11 1-pole auxiliary
Side-mounted contact blocks
2-pole auxiliary
contact block
CA 5...
Front-mounted
4-pole auxiliary
contact block
* TP...
Pneumatic
timer
*Use Electronic Timer TE 5S (page 4/6) with A(E) 95 and A(E) 110 Contactors
VH ...
VK ...
CAL 16-11
E0542D3
E0552D3
E0543D3
E0544D3
E0722D
N ............................... (1) 2 2 E 1 to 4 CA 5- 1 CA 5- 1 to 2 1 VM/E 5-1 block
N ............................... (1) 3 1 E 1-pole blocks or 4-pole block or 1 TP - A block + CAL 5-11 blocks or
+ 1 CAL5-11 block
N ................................... 4 0 E
N ................................... 4 4 E
N ................................... 5 3 E 1 to 2 1 VM/E 5-1 block
N ................................... 6 2 E — — — + CAL 5-11 blocks or
+ 1 CAL5-1 block
N ................................... 7 1 E
N ................................... 8 0 E
A 9 - A 26 - 3 0 - 1 0
A 9 - A 26 - 3 0 - 0 1 1 to 4 CA 5- 1 CA 5- 1 to 2 M
(1)
or or 1 TP. - A block + or 1 V /E 5-1 block
A 9 - A 26 - 4 0 - 0 0 1-pole blocks 4-pole block CAL 5-11 blocks + 1 CAL5-11 block
A 9 - A 26 - 2 2 - 0 0 (1)
A 9 - A 16 - 3 0 - 2 2 1 to 2 1 VM/E 5-1 block
A 9 - A 26 - 3 0 - 3 2 — — — + CAL 5-11 blocks or + 1 CAL5-11 block
A 30, A 40 - 3 0 - 1 0 1 to 5 CA 5- 1 CA 5- 4-pole block 1 TP - A block 1 to 2 1 VM/E 5-1 block
+
A 30, A 40
A 30, A 40
- 3 0
- 3 0
-
-
0
3
1
2
1-pole blocks
1 CA 5-
or
+ 1 CA 5- 1-pole block
—
or
+ 1 CA 5- 1-pole block
— +
CAL 5-11 blocks
1 to 2
or
+ 1 CAL5-11 block
1 VM/E 5-1 block
or + 1 CAL5-11 block
4
1-pole block CAL 5-11 blocks
A 50 - A 75 - 3 0 - 0 0 1 to 6 CA 5- 1 CA 5- 4-pole block 1 TP - A block
A 45 - A 75 - 4 0 - 0 0 1-pole blocks + 2 CA 5- 1-pole blocks + 2 CA 5- 1 to 2 1 VE 5-2 block
A 45, A 75 - 2 2 - 0 0 (2)
or or
1-pole blocks
+ CAL 5-11 blocks
or
+ 1 CAL5-11 block
A 95, A 110 - 3 0 - 0 0 —
A 50 - A 75 - 3 0 - 2 2 2 CA 5- 1 to 2 1 VE 5-2 block
A 95, A 110 - 3 0 - 2 2 1-pole blocks — — + CAL 5-11 blocks or + 1 CAL5-11 block
AE 50 - AE 75 - 3 0 - 0 0 1 CA 5- 4-pole block 1 TP - A block
AE 45 - AE 75 - 4 0 - 0 0 1 to 6 CA 5- + 2 CA 5- 1-pole blocks or + 2 CA 5- 1 CAL 5-11 block 1 VE 5-2 block
AE 45, AE 75 - 2 2 - 0 0 (2) 1-pole blocks
or
1-pole blocks
+ or
AE 95, AE 110 - 3 0 - 0 0 —
A 50 - A 75 - 3 0 - 1 1 1 CA 5- 4-pole block 1 TP - A block 1 CAL 5-11 block 1 VE 5-2 block
AE 50, AE 75 - 3 0 - 1 1 1 to 6 CA 5- + 2 CA 5- 1-pole blocks + 2 CA 5- — or —
A 95, A 110 - 3 0 - 1 1 1-pole blocks or or 1-pole blocks 1 CAL 5-11 block 1 VE 5-2 block
AE 95, AE 110 - 3 0 - 1 1 + — or —
(1) In mounting position 5 (see pages 2/37 and 3/8), there should be no more than 2 "N.C." front-mounted auxiliary contacts - The CAL 5-11 side-mounted blocks offer additional "N.C." contacts.
(2) Whatever the mounting position (see page 2/37), there should be no more than 2 "N.C." front-mounted auxiliary contacts - The CAL 5-11 side-mounted blocks offer additional "N.C." contacts.
EH 3-pole and EK 4-pole contactors CAL16-11. 2-pole auxiliary contact blocks with side mounting
and reversing contactors with VH 550 and VH 800 13 21 31 43 53 61 71 83 35 47
mechanical interlock units (rear-mounted)
E0723D
Built-in
14 22 32 44 54 62 72 84 36 48
Type Main auxiliary
poles contacts CAL16-11 A CAL16-11 B CAL16-11 C CAL16-11 D CAL16-11 E
Contact 35-36
delivered wired
CA B D in the coil circuit
E0724D
CA B D KP
EH 145 - EH 800 - 3 0 1 1 ---->
E0725D
CA 40 ... E CA E
and 2 2 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - ->
E0725D
E0726D
400 Hz
EH 3-pole and EK 4-pole reversing contactors VH 145 - VH 300 mechanical and electrical interlock units
with VH.. mechanical and electrical interlock units. Factory-mounted auxiliary contact blocks (A or E) and add-on blocks (B, C, D)
400 Hz 400 Hz
Description
Auxiliary contact blocks are available in 1-pole, 2-pole or 4-pole versions.
Types – CA- : instantaneous, N.O. or N.C.
– CC- : N.O. leading or N.C. lagging.
They are equipped with screw type connecting terminals delivered open and protected against accidental direct
SB7603S2
Ordering Details
Type Order code Contact blocks Max. number of blocks Packing Weight
SB7379S4
(2) Mounting of a CCL 16-11 E block does not allow an additional second block to be added on top of it.
CAL 16-11 .
● Terminal Marking and Positioning ........................ Section 8 ● Mounting and Compatibility ................................. page 4/3
● Dimensions ............................................................. Section 9
Technical Data
Types 1-pole CA 5, 4-pole CA 5 2-pole CAL 16-11
2-pole CAL 5-11 and 1-pole CC 5 2-pole CCL 16-11
Standards IEC 947-5-1 and EN 60947-5-1
Certifications and approvals See section 7
Rated insulation voltage Ui
according to IEC 947-5-1 V 690 690
according to UL/CSA V 600 600
Rated operational voltage Ue ~V 24 to 690 24 to 690
Conventional thermal current Ith A 16 10
Rated operational current Ie
in AC-15 acc. to IEC 947-5-1 24 to 127 V A 6 6
220 to 240 V A 4 6
380 to 440 V A 3 4
500 to 690 V A 2 1
in DC-13 acc. to IEC 947-5-1 24 V A 6 6
48 V A 2.8 6
72 V A 1 4
125 V A 0.55 1.8
250 V A 0.3 0.6
Connecting terminals M 3.5 (+,-) pozidriv 2 screw
(delivered in open position. Screws of unused terminals should be tightened).
Connecting capacity
with cable clamp 4
● Rigid solid 1 or 2 x mm2 1 to 4 0.5 to 2.5
● Flexible with cable end 1 x mm2 0.75 to 2.5 0.5 to 2.5
2 x mm2 0.75 to 2.5 0.5 to 2.5
● Flexible with sleeve 1 or 2 x mm2 — 0.5 to 1.5
Mechanical durability cycles 10 million
Max. switching frequency cycles/h 3600
Electrical durability See curve below
Max. switching frequency cycles/h 1200
Rated making capacity 10 x Ie AC-15
Rated breaking capacity 10 x Ie AC-15
Rated short-time withstand current Icw 1s A 100 50
θ = 40°C 0.1 s A 140 100
Min. switching capacity 17 V / 5 mA 0.25 VA / 12 V or 0.25 VA / 5 mA
Short-circuit protection - gG (gl) fuses A 10 10
Power loss per pole at 6 A W 0.15 0.2
Degree of protection according to IEC 529,
IEC 144, DIN 40 050 and NFC 20-010 IP 20 IP 20
Electrical durability 30
20
AC-15 according to IEC 947-5-1
making current: 10 x Ie where cos ϕ = 0.7 and Ue 10
breaking current: Ie where cos ϕ = 0.4 and Ue
5
The curves opposite show the electrical durability of the auxiliary CA 5, CAL 5
Million ops
3
contact blocks according to breaking current Ic.
2
These curves have been plotted for resistive and inductive loads up to CAL 16
1
690 V, 40 to 60 Hz.
0.5
0.3
0.2
E0731DG
0.1
0.02 0.05 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.5 1 2 3 4 5 6 10
Breaking current (A)
Application
Utilization
When used in star-delta starters, the TE5S lags the star connection and provides a lapse of 50 ms before the
switchover to delta connection.
Description
According to the type of device chosen, the electronic circuit has a 24 V a.c/d.c.,
110 to 120 V a.c., 220 to 240 V a.c. or 380…440 V a.c. supply. An output relay with reversing contact ensures
high current switching. A two-position switch allows selection of one of the two time delay ranges: 0.8 to 8 s
or 6 to 60 s. The 0.1 to 1.0 graduated button allows an initial setting without steps within the previously selected
range which can then be adjusted using a chronometer.
Note: We recommend that you allow for temperature drift for the final adjustment of the time delay setting.
Drift: – 0.2% per °C.
For example, a setting made at 20 °C will yield a time delay shorter by 7% at 55 °C in a cubicle.
SB7558S4
Operation
On energization, the green U indicator light (voltage applied) comes on. Contact 15-16 then immediately moves
to the closed position.
U Count-down of the programmed time immediately commences.
When the time delay has elapsed, contact 15-16 opens and at the same time the 50 ms lapse, t2, begins after
15-16
R
which contact 15-18 moves to the closed position. The yellow R indicator light comes on.
E0719D
15-18 On de-energization, the U and R indicator lights go out and, after the 250 ms resetting time, the device is ready
for a new cycle.
t1 t2 (t2 = 50ms)
Chart Mounting
On 35 x 7.5 mm or 35 x 15 mm mounting rail according to EN 50022.
Ordering details
Type Order code Rated control For contactors Packing Weight
voltage Uc
V piece kg
TE5S-24 1SBN 02 0010 R1001 24 a.c./d.c. A 9 ... EH 800 (1) 1 0.080
TE5S-120 1SBN 02 0010 R1002 110 ... 120 a.c. A 9 ... EH 800 (1) 1 0.080
A1
15
t1 t1+t2
TE5S-240 1SBN 02 0010 R1003 220 ... 240 a.c. A 9 ... EH 800 (1) 1 0.080
TE5S-440 1SBN 02 0010 R1004 380 ... 440 a.c. A 9 ... EH 800 (1) 1 0.080
E0718D
A2
16
18
(1) Interpose an N Contactor Relay between the TE 5S Timer and the Coil of EH 700 and EH 800 Contactors.
Equivalent diagram
A1 15
TE5S
U
U c=
0.5
x 0.1
1.0
8s t1 60s
R
Star-Delta Timer
E0720D
16 18 A2
Front face
Technical data
Type TE5S - 24 TE5S - 120 TE5S - 240 TE5S - 440
Compliance with standards IEC 947-5-1, EN 60947-5-1 and VDE 0435
Rated insulation voltage Ui according to IEC 947-5-1 V 440
Rated supply voltage Uc V d.c. 24 – – –
V a.c. 24 110 to 120 220 to 240 380 to 440
Rated frequency limits Hz 48 to 63
Supply voltage range 0.85 to 1.1 Uc
Overvoltage protection Built-in varistor
Load factor % 100
Average consumption in d.c. W 0.7 – – –
in a.c. VA 1.5 3.5 6.5 12.5
Time delay range (t1 ) selected by switch S 0.8 to 8 and 6 to 60
Temperature drift % per °C - 0.2
Mechanical setting accuracy ± 15 % of the setting range
On-load reiteration accuracy
under constant conditions ± 2 % after 1 million operations
Minimum time lapse (t2 ) ms 50
Min. time lapse after 1 million operations
Resetting time (maximum)
ms
ms
40
250
4
Front panel display: green indicator light Energization
yellow indicator light Output relay activated
Rated operational voltage Ue acc. to IEC 947-5-1 V d.c. 24 –
V a.c. 24 to 240 440
Conventional free air thermal current Ith A 10
Rated operational current Ie acc. to IEC 947-5-1
DC-13 24 V d.c. A 4 –
AC-15 24 to 120 V a.c. A 5 –
220 to 240 V a.c. A 4 –
380 to 440 V a.c. A – –
Permissible air temperature
for operation °C - 25 to + 60
for storage °C - 40 to + 85
Mechanical durability in millions of operations 5
Electrical durability in millions of operations 1
On-load maximum switching frequency ops./h 720 600
Short-circuit protection - gG (gl) type fuses A 10
Vibration withstand acc. to C
Application
The timer blocks are equipped with adjustable time delay auxiliary contacts.
Types:
– TP- DA (blue button) for time delay on energization.
– TP- IA (black button) for time delay on de-energization.
Description:
● Pneumatic timer with 350° linear scale and setting via marked knurled knob.
SB7589S3
● Block equipped with 2 time-delayed auxiliary contacts: 1N.O. and 1N.C. (electrically separate).
TP 40DA ● Captive screw type connecting terminals with built-in cable clamps. M 3.5 (+, –) pozidriv 2 screw with
screwdriver guidance, supplied untightened and protected against accidental direct contact.
Mounting:
Clipped onto the front panel of A 9 to A 75, BC 9 to BC 30, AE 45 to AE 75, GA 75, GAE 75 contactors and
N and KC contactor relays, except for devices equipped with TBC and TKC type coils having large voltage
ranges.
For further details, please turn to page 4/3 describing mounting compatibility with the other accessories.
Accessory:
BX-TP plastic sealed cover protecting access to the time delay setting.
Ordering Details
Type Order code Time delay Packing Weight
setting
piece kg
TP 40 DA 1SBN 02 0300 R1000 0.1 to 40 s 1 0.07
TP 180 DA 1SBN 02 0300 R1001 10 to 180 s 1 0.07
PTM 89 6185
Technical Data
Standards IEC 947-5-1 ; EN 60947-5-1
Certifications and approvals see section 7
Connection capacity
rigid mm2 1 or 2 x 1to 2.5
supple 1 x mm2 1 to 2.5
2 x mm2 0.75 to 2.5
Rated insulation voltage Ui
acc. to IEC 947-1 ~V 690
Rated operational voltage Ue ~V 24 to 690
Conventional thermal current Ith A 10
Rated operational current Ie
AC-15 acc. to IEC 947-5-1 24-127 V A 6
220-240 V A 4
380-400 V A 3
500/690 V A 1/0.5
DC-13 acc. to IEC 947-5-1 24 V A 6
48 V A 2.8
72 V A 1
125 V A 0.55
250 V A 0.3
Mechanical durability
Electrical durability
cycles
see curve below
5 million
4
Max. switching frequency cycles/h 1200
Rated making capacity 10 x Ie AC -15
Rated breaking capacity 10 x Ie AC-15
Rated short-time withstand current Icw at θ = 40°C
1s A 50
0.1 s A 100
Short-circuit protection - Gg (gl) fuses 10 A
Heat loss per pole at 6 A W 0.15
N.O. and N.C. contact non-overlapping time ms 1 to 2
Resetting time ms approx. 40
Accuracy (measured over 10 successive cycles) ±2 %
Drift (variation in mean value during TP lifetime) TP…DA: –15 to 15 %
TP…IA: –25 to +15 %
Drift according to ambient temperature
between –20°C and +20°C 0.25 % per °Kelvin
between +20°C and +65°C 0.20 % per °Kelvin
Electrical durability
AC-15 acc. to IEC 947-5-1 and EN 60947-5-1:
– making current: 10 x Ie where cos ϕ = 0.7 and Ue
– breaking current: Ie where cos ϕ = 0.4 and Ue
The curve opposite shows the electrical durability of the timer blocks in relation to the breaking current Ic.
This curve has been plotted for resistive and inductive loads up to 690 V, 40 to 60 Hz provided that the contactor is activated by the control device
in random manner with respect to the mains phase.
30
20
Terminal marking 10
5
TP 40 DA TP 40 IA
Million ops
3
TP 180 DA TP 180 IA 2
TP
55 67 57 65 1
0.5
A 406 D
A 407 D
0.3
E0732DG
56 68 58 66 0.2
0.1
0.02 0.05 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.5 1 2 3 4 56 10
Breaking current (A)
Utilization
When mounted between two contactors, the mechanical interlock unit prevents one of the contactors from closing as long as the other contactor is closed.
Range
● Mechanical interlocking of two horizontal mounted contactors, a.c. or d.c. coil
● Mechanical and electrical interlocking of two horizontal mounted contactors, a.c. or d.c. coil
Type For contactors Fixing
On left On right
VE 5-1 N, A 9 to 40 N, A 9 to 40 or plate not supplied
VE 5-2 (1) A(E) 45 to 110 A(E) 45 to 110 or plate not supplied
VH 145 EH 145 EH 145 additional plate PN 145-21 (see p.4/26)
EK 110, 150 EK 110, 150 additional plate PN 210-22 (see p.4/26)
VH 210 A EH 175, 210 EH 145 additional plate PN 210-22 (see p.4/26)
VH 300 EH 175 to 300 EH 175 to 300 additional plate PN 210-22 (see p.4/26)
EK 175, 210 EK 175, 210 additional plate PN 300-22 (see p.4/26)
(1) The combination of A(E) 45 - 75 interlocked with A(E) 95/110 cannot be mounted on symmetrical rail (75mm EN50023).
(2) Suitable for interlocking of 2 contactors with the same number of poles (3P or 4P), the same magnetic circuit type (A or AE type), a same or different rating (as per selection tables below).
● Mechanical and electrical interlocking of two vertical mounted contactors, a.c. coil only
Optional mounting of two additional CA 16 - auxiliary contact blocks
Type For contactors Fixing
Up Down
VHV 145 EH 145 EH 145
VKV 150
VHV 210
VHV 300
VHV 210 A
EK 110, 150
EH 175, 210
EH 260, 300
EK 175, 210
EK 175, 210
EK 110, 150
EH 175, 210
EH 260, 300
EK 175, 210
EH 145
} additional plate not supplied
Selection tables
● Mechanical interlocking of two horizontal mounted contactors, a.c. or d.c. coil
Right
KC, BC 9 - 30 N, A 9 - 26 A 30, 40 A(E) 45- 75 A(E) 95, 110 EH 145 EH 175, 210 EH 260, 300 EH 370, 550 EH 700, 800
Left
KC, BC 9 - 30 VBC 30
N, A 9 - A 26 VM/E 5-1 VM/E 5-1
A 30, 40 VM/E 5-1 VM/E 5-1 VE 5-2
A(E) 45- 75 VE 5-2 VE 5-2 VE 5-2
A(E) 95, 110 VE 5-2 VE 5-2
EH 145 VH 145
EH 175, 210 VH 210 A VH 300
EH 260 VH 300 VH 300
EH 300 VH 300
EH 370, 550 VH 550 VH 550
EH 700, 800 VH 800 VH 800
● Interlocking of two horizontal mounted contactors, ● Interlocking of two vertical mounted contactors,
a.c. or d.c. coil a.c. coil only
Right Down
EK 110, 150 EK 175, 210 EK 370, 550 EH 145 EH 175, 210 EH 260, 300 EK 110, 150 EK 175, 210
Left Up
EK 110, 150 VH 145 EH 145 VHV 145
EK 175, 210 VH 300 EH 175, 210 VHV 210
EK 370, 550 VH 800 EH 260, 300 VHV 300
● For mechanical interlocking of two horizontal mounted
EK 110, 150 VKV 150
contactors equipped with mechanical latching units: EK 175, 210 VHV 300
see page 4/12
● Mounting and Compatibility of Accessories ............................................... page 4/3 ● Dimensions .................................................................................................... Section 9
Ordering Details
Mechanical interlocking of two horizontal mounted contactors, a.c. or d.c. coil
Type Order code Packing Weight
piece kg
VBC 30 GJL 280 1911 R0001 1 0.015
VM 5-1 1SBN 03 0100 R1000 1 0.066
6530
Technical Data
VH 145 Types VE 5-1 VH(V) Types VE 5-1 / VE 5-2
VE 5-2 145 - 300 VH(V)145...300
Standards IEC 947-5-1 & Connecting terminals delivered M 3.5 (+,-) pozidriv 2
EN 60947-5-1 in open position (screws of unused screw
Rated insulation voltage Ui terminals should be tightened) with cable clamp
acc. to IEC 947-5-1 V 690 Connection capacity
acc. to UL/CSA V 600 ● Rigid solid 1 or 2 x mm2 1 to 4(1)
Rated operational voltage Ue ~V 24 to 690 ● Flexible with end 1 or 2 x mm2 0.75 to 2.5
Conventional thermal current Ith Mechanical durability cycles 5 million (2)
A 16 10 Max. switching
frequency cycles /h 600
Rated operational current Ie
Rated making capacity 10 x Ie AC-15
in AC-15 acc. to IEC 947-5-1
A 859
Technical note
When, during switching, the arc time is estimated at more than 40 ms, the closing signal of one of the two contactors
CA 16-. must be delayed with respect to the opening signal of the other contactor in order to prevent a short-circuit.
Use a TP 40 pneumatic timer or a TE5S electronic timer with time lapse, as applicable.
● Mounting and Compatibility of Accessories ........ Page 4/3 ● Plates ...................................................................... page 4/26
● Power Connections .............................................. Page 4/24 ● Dimensions .............................................................. Section 9
Utilization
For converting standard contactors into latched contactors.
Types
WB 75-A for A9 - A75, BC 9 - BC 30, AE45 - AE75 contactors and N and KC 1-stack contactor relays.
WH 145 - WH 800 for EH 145 - EH 800 contactors with a.c. and d.c. coil.
WH 145 R - WH 800 R for mounting on the righthand side contactor in a reversing combination.
SB6548S3
WH 145 L - WH 800 L for mounting on the lefthand side contactor in a reversing combination.
Description
WB 75-A
● WB 75-A block: contains a mechanical latching device with electromagnetic impulse unlatching (a.c. or
d.c.) or manual unlatching.
Captive screw type connecting terminals, built-in cable clamps, M 3.5 (+,-) pozidriv 1 screw with screwdriver
guidance; delivered untightened and protected against accidental direct contact.
Operation:
after closing, the contactor continues to be held in the closed position by the latching mechanism should the
supply voltage fail at the contactor coil terminals.
Contactor opening can be controlled:
– electrically by an impulse* (a.c. or d.c.) on the WB 75-A block coil.
A_031
WH 300 – manually by pressing the pushbutton on the front face of the WB 75-A block.
● WH 145 - WH 800: consisting of a block containing the latching mechanism and a plate for fixing to a
contactor, they come with an a.c. impulse operated coil* or a d.c. impulse operated coil*.
* the coils are not designed to be permanently energized.
As regards the horizontal mounted reversing contactors, these can be directly fixed onto the plate holding the
2 contactors.
Each (or only one contactor with the same or different) ratings can be equipped with a mechanical latching
A_091
Technical Data
Types WB75-A WH145 WH210 WH300 WH550 WH800
Rated insulation voltage Ui V 690 690
Cable cross-sectional area:
– 1 or 2 rigid conductors mm2 1 to 4 0.5 to 1.5
– 1 or 2 flexible conductors mm2 0.75 to 2.5 0.5 to 1.5
Mechanical durability million ops. 1 1
Max. switching ops/h 3600 with 1200 with
frequency on-load factor of 8% on-load factor of 25%
Rated control voltage UC a.c. 24 to 480 V 24 to 600 V
d.c. 24 to 415 V 12 to 220 V
Coil operating range 0.85 to 1.1 UC 0.85 to 1.1 UC
Max. electrical impulse time
– on a.c. coil s 20 20
with load factor % 5 20
– on d.c. coil s 8 20
with load factor % 3 20
Min. electrical impulse time
– for latching: BC 9 - 30 A 9 - 40
A(E)45 - 75
(energizing of the ms in a.c. 40 50 30 30 50
contactor coil)
– for pull-out:
ms in d.c. 80 50 30 40 80
4
(energizing of the ms in a.c. 30 20
WB/WH block coil) ms in d.c. 50 20
Coil consumption (mean value)
– a.c. operated coil inrush VA 90 300
holding VA 60 35
– d.c. operated coil W 110 350
Operating time
– on contactor closing (latching)
between coil energization and:
N.O. contact closing
N.C. contact opening } see pages 2/36 and 2/42: no difference with the operation of a contactor only.
– on contactor opening (unlatching)
between WB.. coil energization and: A, BC, AE
N.O. contact opening ms 5 to 25 10 to 18 13 to 25
N.C. contact closing ms 7to 28 13 to 20 15 to 28
Suggestion for a diagram of an EH contactor with a WH mechanical latching unit
a.c. coil d.c. coil
I/O impulse pushbuttons I/O impulse pushbuttons
(–) +
US US
34
O S0 I S1
I S1 O S0 K5
12
33
12
11
E2 A2
AS K1
11
91 A 425
E1 A1
US N
44 24
K1 K5
S0 OFF pushbutton
K1 Contactor 43 23
S1 ON pushbutton
AS Mechanical latching unit 14 14
K5 Contactor relay
K1 K5
Block diagram:
13 13
A2 E2 A2
K5 As K1
91 A 303
A1 E1 A1
91 A 426
US N
(+) –
Surge Suppressors
for Contactor Coils
(V)
General
1000
The operation of inductive circuits causes overvoltages, in particular on opening of the contactor coil.
T (µs)
0 100 The electromagnetic energy stored by the coil during contactor closing is restored on opening in the form of
1000 surges, the slope and amplitude of which may rise to several kilovolts. A number of drawbacks are observed
ranging from interference on the electronic devices to breakdown of insulators and even destruction of certain
0 100
sensitive components.
A 884D
The graph opposite reproduces the oscillogram showing voltage discharges at the terminals of a 42V/50Hz coil
without peak clipping. The coil was switched by 8 series-connected poles of a contactor relay.
Following a burst of discharges with a very steep slope a damped oscillation emerges with a peak value of
3500V.
Overvoltage Factor
SB7610S3
The overvoltage factor k is defined as the ratio of the maximum overvoltage peak value Ûs to the peak value
Ûc of the coil rated control voltage Uc:
RT 7/...
Ûs max. Ûs max. Ûs max.
k = _______ in d.c.: k = _______ or in a.c.: k = _______
Ûc Uc Uc√2
3500
For example the following is obtained for the above graph: k = _____ ≈ 60
42 √2
Surge Suppressors
To guard against the harmful effects of these overvoltages, ABB has developed a range of surge suppressors
designed to reduce the k factor defined above and to limit or even completely eliminate the high pre-damping
voltage frequencies.
Each case is different, but the technical data tolerances and the generous sizing of parts have enabled us to
reduce the number of variants.
We have chosen the following solutions: transil diodes, varistors and RC blocks.
Note: A varistor is a resistor whose value increases to a very large extent when a certain voltage is applied
at its terminals.
SB7400S4
Wiring Diagrams
Transil diode Varistor (only) RC type Varistor + RC
RV 5/50
A1 A1 A1 A1
E0734D
U
E0733D
E0735D
E0736D
A2 A2 A2 A2
The housings and impregnation resins of the surge suppressors are made of flame-resistant materials in
accordance with the UL 94 standard.
RC 5-1/150
These systems are not polarized, i.e. d.c. operated devices do not have to be connected in a specific direction.
● Operating temperature: -20 to +70 °C
● Connection to the coil terminals (parallel mounting)
– For RT 7, RV-BC 6 and RC-EH: flexible, accessible leads, equipped with forked lugs.
Except for the RV-BC 6 F variant: 2.8 mm faston.
– For RT 5, RV 5, RC 5-1 and RC 5-2: clip-on for both fixing and connection.
● Fixing:
– RV-BC 6 and RT 7: dovetail mounting on both the top and bottom part of the contactor base.
Alternatively, they can be clipped onto the front part of the contactor head.
A_078
– RT 5, RV 5 and RC 5: clipped onto the top part of the contactor base. This mounting method
RC-EH…/... prevents any projections and change in contactor dimensions.
– RC-EH: glued to the top part of the contactor base.
Surge Suppressors
for Contactor Coils
Technical Data
Type Control Opening time Residual overvoltage Remarks
circuit growth factor or clipping voltage
RT 7 or RT 5 /... transil diode 2.5 to 3 Advantages ● Good energy absorption
32 d.c. 50 V ● Unpolarized system
E0737D
● No operating delays
Varistor + RC RC-EH ... 1.1 to 1.5 Advantages ● High energy absorption: good damping
800/110 a.c./d.c.
800/600 a.c.
205 V
1100 V
●
●
Unpolarized system
The RC system damps the voltage
4
E0739D
Ordering Details
Type Order code Control voltage Mounting on contactors Packing Weight
V d.c. a.c. kg
RT 7/32 FPTN 377 043 R0001 12 to 32 ● 10 0.007
RT 7/65 FPTN 377 044 R0001 25t to 65 ● 10 0.007
RT 7/90 FPTN 377 045 R0001 50 to 90 ● (T)KC and (T)BC9 to (T)BC 30 10 0.007
RT 7/150 FPTN 377 046 R0001 77 to 150 ● 10 0.007
RT 7/264 FPTN 377 047 R0001 150 to 264 ● 10 0.007
RV-BC 6/60 GHV 250 1902 R0002 24 to 60 ● 10 0.004
RV-BC 6/127 GHV 250 1908 R0002 50 to 127 ● KC and BC 9 to BC 30 10 0.004
RV-BC 6/250 GHV 250 1903 R0002 110 to 250 ● 10 0.004
RV-BC 6/380 GHV 250 1904 R0002 200 to 420 ● 10 0.004
RV-BC 6-F/60 GHV 250 1902 R0003 24 to 60 ● 10 0.004
RV-BC 6-F/127 GHV 250 1908 R0003 50 to 127 ● KC and BC 9 to BC 30 10 0.004
RV-BC 6-F/250 GHV 250 1903 R0003 110 to 250 ● The coils must be equipped with 2.8 mm flat pin lugs. 10 0.004
RV-BC 6-F/380 GHV 250 1904 R0003 200 to 420 ● 10 0.004
RT 5/32 1SBN 05 0020 R1000 12 to 32 ● 2 0.015
RT 5/65 1SBN 05 0020 R1001 25 to 65 ● 2 0.015
RT 5/90 1SBN 05 0020 R1002 50 to 90 ● (T)AE 45 to (T)AE 75 and AE 95/110 2 0.015
RT 5/150 1SBN 05 0020 R1003 77 to 150 ● 2 0.015
RT 5/264 1SBN 05 0020 R1004 150 to 264 ● 2 0.015
RV 5/50 1SBN 05 0010 R1000 24 to 50 ● ● 2 0.015
RV 5/133 1SBN 05 0010 R1001 50 to 133 ● ● 2 0.015
RV 5/250 1SBN 05 0010 R1002 110 to 250 ● ● N, A 9 to A 110 and AE 45 to AE 110 2 0.015
RV 5/440 1SBN 05 0010 R1003 250 to 440 ● ● 2 0.015
RC 5-1/50 1SBN 05 0100 R1000 24 to 50 ● 2 0.012
RC 5-1/133 1SBN 05 0100 R1001 50 to 133 ● N and A 9 to A 40 2 0.012
RC 5-1/250 1SBN 05 0100 R1002 110 to 250 ● 2 0.012
RC 5-1/440 1SBN 05 0100 R1003 250 to 440 ● 2 0.012
RC 5-2/50 1SBN 05 0200 R1000 24 to 50 ● 2 0.015
RC 5-2/133 1SBN 05 0200 R1001 50 to 133 ● 2 0.015
RC 5-2/250 1SBN 05 0200 R1002 110 to 250 ● A 45 to A 110 2 0.015
RC 5-2/440 1SBN 05 0200 R1003 250 to 440 ● 2 0.015
RC-EH 300/48 SK 829 007-A 24 to 48 ● EH 145 to EH 300 and 1 0.015
RC-EH 300/415 SK 829 007-B 110 to 415 ● EK 110 to EK 210 1 0.015
RC-EH 800/110 SK 829 007-C 48 to 110 ● EH 370 to 800 and EK 370 to 550 1 0.015
24 to 125 ● EH 145 to 800 and EK 110 to 550 1 0.015
RC-EH 800/600 SK 829 007-D 220 to 600 ● EH 370 to 800 and EK 370 to 550 1 0.015
Utilization
RA 30 and RA 5 interface relays are designed to receive 24 V d.c. signals delivered by PLC's or other sources
with a low output power and to restore them with sufficient power to operate the coils of the relevant
contactors.
SB7117S4
Types
RA 30 – RA 30 for combination with B C 9 to BC 30 contactors and KC contactor relays.
– RA 5 for combination with A 9 - A 110 contactors and N contactor relays.
Description
RA 30 and RA 5 interface relays are made up of a miniature electromechanical relay equipped with a N.O.
contact and with a low consumption 24 V d.c. coil.
The interface relay coil is controlled by the PLC while the N.O. contact ensures switching of the power contactor.
Coil switching gives rise to overvoltages which have adverse effects on the electronic devices, insulators and,
more generally, on component lifetime. The RA 30 and RA 5 are equipped with surge suppressors:
– on the 24 V d.c. relay coil via a diode
– on the power contactor coil via a varistor.
Furthermore, the RA 30 and RA 5 are protected against relay pole reversal by a diode inserted between the
E1 and E2 input terminals.
SB 7615S3
Connection
BC 9-30-10 + RA 30
The "E1+" and "E2 –" input terminals must be connected, according to their polarity, to the PLC output.
● The RA 30 has two leads to be connected to the A1 and A2 terminals of the contactor coil. This coil is supplied
between its own A2 terminal and the A0 terminal of the RA 30.
● The RA 5 is equipped with two terminal pads for connection to the A1 and A2 terminals of the contactor coil.
This coil is supplied between the A0 and A2 terminals of the RA 5.
PLC PLC
Output Output
Uc – +
– +
24 V d.c. 250 V a.c. 24 V d.c.
A0 E2 – E1 +
A0 A2 E2 – E1 +
SB 7611S3
RA 30
RA 5
RA 5
Uc 250 V d.c.
A1
A1
KM1
E0742DG
KM1
E0741DG
A2
A2
Mounting
– RA 30: dovetail mounting at the top of the contactor base.
– RA 5: terminal pads clamped inside the contactor coil terminals.
Ordering Details
Type Order code Control Mounting on contactors Packing Weight
SB 7614S3
Types RA 30 RA 5
Construction Data
Surge suppression:
● for contactor coil Varistor
● for interface relay coil Diode
Protection against polarity reversal between terminals E1 and E2 Diode
Use on contactors with coils:
● 24 to 250 V / 50, 60 Hz types – N, A9 - A110
● 12 to 250 V d.c. types KC, BC9 - BC30 –
Interface relay operating time ms Closing and drop-out ≤ 10
Total operating time,
interface relay + contactor:
● between energization and:
– N.O. contact closing ms 59 to 84 19 to 36
– N.C. contact opening ms 54 to 79 16 to 32
● between de-energization and:
– N.O. contact opening ms 25 to 40 15 to 25
– N.C. contact closing ms 27 to 42 18 to 28
Connecting Auxiliaries
for Control Leads
Impulse Contact Blocks
Terminals for control lead connections: LK
Utilization
Terminals designed to connect the control conductors to the main poles of the A and AE 45 to 110 contactors.
SB7576S3
Degree of protection IP 20
Connecting terminal delivered in open position: cable clamp and M3.5 (+,-) pozidriv 2 screw.
Cable cross-sectional area: - 1 or 2 rigid conductors 1 to 4 mm2
LK 75-A - 1 or 2 flexible conductors 1 to 2.5 mm2
Mounting
Clipped into the slots placed above each power terminal connector.
The LK 75 are fitted with a pin designed to hold them in place until the connector has been fully clamped
with its power cable.
The LK 110 must be held in place until the connector has been clamped.
Ordering details
SB7577S3
piece kg
LK 75-A 1
LK 75-A 1SBN 07 3552 R1000 right and left on A(E) 45 to 75 2 0.006
LK 75-A 1 1SBN 07 3552 R1001 opposite on A(E) 45 to 75 2 0.006
LK 110 1SFN 07 4352 R1000 right and left on A(E) 95 to 110 2 0.010
Screw, for control lead connection to the main terminals of the EH/EK contactors
Utilization
M4 x 12 screws for connecting the control conductors to the terminal pads of the main poles of the
EH 145 to 800 and EK 110 to 550 contactors.
Ordering details
SB7575S3
piece kg
LK 110
- 2121 2415 - 291 EH 145 to 800 and EK 110 to 550 10 0.002
Ordering details
Type Order code Contact Packing Weight
LK ... positioning
piece kg
CB 5-10 1SBN 01 0013 R1010 1 - 1 0.012
CB 5-01 1SBN 01 0013 R1001 - 1 1 0.012
SB7571S3
CB 5 …
Lamp Holder
Fuse Holder
Function Markers
Equipped with 2 connecting leads (1 mm2 and approx. 10 cm long), with 3 lenses (green, red, colourless) for
fixing on the front face of the d.o.l. starter enclosures (insulated enclosures).
Mounting
Clipped onto the front face of A 9 to A 110, AE 45 to AE 110 and BC 9 to BC 30 contactors.
Ordering details
SB7567S3
SB7569S3
piece kg
BL 5 - L
BL 5 - L 1SBN 07 0054 R1000 1 0.022
Ordering details
Type Order code Packing Weight
kg
SB7567S3
BL 5 - F
Function Marker: BA 5 - 50
Utilization
For marking contactors, thermal O/L relays, contactor relays and accessories.
Description
The BA 5 - 50 is a set of 50 function markers designed to be clipped onto the front face of devices.
Effective marking surface: 7 x 19 mm
Details can be added to these markers using a ball point pen, indelible felt-tip pen or pentel white. Self-
adhesive labels (not supplied) can also be added to them.
Ordering details
Type Order code Mounting on: Packing Weight
box kg
BA 5 - 50 1SBN 11 0000 R1000 contactors (except EH and EK), 1 0.017
SB7587S4
BA 5 - 50
Utilization
Parallel and series connection of 3-pole and 4-pole contactor poles:
● To obtain a star point (3 parallel-connected poles): LY, LF, (LY allows 3 phases to be short-circuited)
● To connect poles in parallel and thus increase the a.c. load passing through the flow path made up of the
parallel-connected poles: LP and LH (2 poles); LY and LF (3 poles); LG (4 poles).
SB7584S2
The maximum permissible current values with parallel-connected poles are given on page 2/54.
The relevant cable cross-sectional area may limit the maximum permissible current. Consult the information
in the table below.
LP 25 ● To connect poles in series and thus increase the d.c. load controlled by the poles: LP and LH.
LY 16 Description
Strip for connection of "n" poles with terminal insulated
LP ... n= 2 no yes
LY 16, LY 110 n= 3 no yes
LH ... n= 2 yes no
LF ... n= 3 yes no
LG ... n= 4 yes no
LY 210 - LY 550 n= 3 no no
SB7170S3/1
Ordering Details
Type Order code for max. nominal Cable cross- Packing Weight
LH contactor continuous sectional area
current with
"n" poles
A mm2 piece kg
LP 16 FPEP 407 000 R0001 N, KC - 6 10 0.002
A 9, BC 9 30 6
A 12 32 6
A 16, BC 16 34 6
SB7170S3/2
EH 175 575 –
EH 210 660
LY 210 - LY 550
LY 300 2631 0243-4 EH 260, 300 980 – 1 0.200
LY 550 2631 0243-5 EH 370 1250 – 1 0.250
EH 550 1800
Connectors
Flat Pin Terminal Blocks
Connectors
Utilization
Connection of copper and aluminium cables to the terminal pads of the poles of EH and EK contactors.
Types
There are three kinds of connectors:
- OXFB ... for copper cables : single steel connector with brass core for
EH 145 - EH 550 and EK 110 - EK 550.
A092
TCD 185-25 SK 173 001-BD 2 x (35 to 185) EH 370, 550, EK 370, 550 3 0.25
TCD . . TCD 300-40 SK 173 001-BE 2 x (95 to 300) EH 700 3 0.26
Mounting
LC16-B Flat pin terminal blocks are fixed by the screw terminals with which the contactor is equipped.
Ordering details
Type Order code for mounting Packing Weight
on contactors
set kg
LC 16-B GJL 280 1912 R0002 KC, BC 9 to BC 16 1 stack 1 0.025
For 2-stack contactors,
2 sets are required.
LC 26-B2 GJL 280 1912 R0005 BC 18 2 stacks 1 0.048
LC 25-B1 GJL 280 1912 R0003 BC 25 1 stack 1 0.023
LC 16-A 1SBN 07 1400 R1000 N, A 9 to A 16 1 stack 1 0.025
4-pole CA 5
LC 26-A1 1SBN 07 2400 R1000 A 26 1 stack 1 0.027
LC 26-A2 1SBN 07 2401 R1000 A 26 2 stacks 1 0.048
Terminal Accessories
piece kg
LD 110 1SFN 07 4308 R1000 A(E) 95 and A(E) 110 1 0.150
LD 110
Terminal Extension Pieces: LX ...
Utilization
LX ... extension pieces are designed to extend the terminal pads of the EH contactors for simultaneous mounting
of the connectors (see page 4/21) and the connection sets (see page 4/24).
Description
The LX ... set contains 3 bars delivered with straps to prevent them from rotating.
Ordering details
Type Order code Dimensions Mounting on contactors Packing Weight
hole Ø bar
mm mm set kg
LX 210 SK879 902-C 11 20 x 5 EH 145 - EH 210 1 0.15
SB6561S3
Terminal Shrouds
Utilization
The use of terminal shrouds on the main terminals of EH contactors is required in electrical panels or cubicles
to be built in compliance with the rules for protection against accidental direct contact with live parts according
to VDE 0106 - Part. 100.
A 9 to A 110, BC 9 to BC 30 and AE 45 to AE 110 contactors do not require additional terminal shrouds as their
terminals are all already protected against accidental direct contact according to VDE 0106 - Part. 100.
Types
On EH 145 to EH 800 and EK 110 to EK 550 contactors:
- the auxiliary contact blocks and coils are designed to provide an IP 20 degree of protection.
- the main terminals, equipped with lugs or connectors, can be protected against accidental direct contact after
wiring (VDE 0106 - Part. 100) by the addition of terminal shrouds (see table below).
Each terminal shroud protects all the terminals on one side of the contactor. Two terminal shrouds should be
provided for each separate contactor.
When the contactor is connected to a thermal O/L relay, use a single LT - E terminal shroud from the table below
Protcov1
for line side protection and a set of LT... terminal shrouds for thermal O/L relay side protection
(see page 5/9).
LT 210 terminal shroud
Ordering details
Type Order code Mounting on contactors Packing Weight
piece kg
LT 210-EL SK 178 001-CB EH 145 - EH 210
with lugs
1 0.060
4
LT 210-EC SK 178 003-CB EH 145 - EH 210 1 0.057
with connectors
LT 300-E SK 178 001-DB EH 260, EH 300 1 0.157
with lugs or connectors
LT 550-E SK 178 001-EB EH 370, EH 550 1 0.168
with lugs or connectors
LT 700-E SK 178 001-FB EH 700 1 0.182
with lugs or connectors
LT 800-E SK 178 001-GB EH 800 1 0.182
with lugs
LT 150-EK SK 178 001-HB EK 110, EK 150 1 0.139
A_818D1
Connection Sets
Description
BEM … The sets are made up of three upstream connections and three downstream connections.
BEM 16-30 - Insulated, solid, rigid copper wires
BEM 26 and 40-30 - Insulated, stranded, rigid copper wires
BEM 75 and 110-30 - Insulated, solid copper bars
BSM 16-30, BSM 25 and 30-30 BC - Insulated, solid, rigid copper wires
BSH 145 - BSH 250 - Insulated, flexible copper bars.
BSH 550 - BSH 800 - Bare, solid copper bars.
On the EH contactors, the power supply by bars or cables equipped with lugs is directly connected to the
terminal pads of the main poles. For flange connectors (see page 4/21), LX … terminal extension pieces should
be used (see page 4/22).
Ordering details
E0745D
3-pole Connections
Utilization
Connections between the main poles of two 3-pole contactors horizontal mounted.
Description
This set is made up of three downstream connections.
A1 A1 Ordering details
1 3 5 1 3 5
set kg
BES 75-30 1SBN 08 3504 R1000 A(E) 50-30 … A(E) 75-30 1 0.130
BES 110 BES 110 1SFN 08 4304 R1000 A(E) 95, A(E) 110 1 0.250
Connection Sets
A1 A1
Connections for 4-pole Changeover Contactors
1 3 5 7 1 3 5 7
2 4 6 8 2 4 6 8 Utilization
A2 A2
Connection between the main poles of two 4-pole contactors mounted side by side so that they operate as
E0743D
source reversing contactors.
contactors set kg
BES 75-40 1SBN 08 3302 R1000 A(E) 45, 50, 75 1 0.400
BSS 100 - BSS 550 BSS 100 SK 829 090-B EK 110 1 0.400
BSS 145 SK 829 090-F EK 150 1 0.700
BSS 210 SK 829 090-G EK 175, 210 1 1.000
BSS 550 SK 829 090-E EK 370, 550 1 3.300
– Three connections for star and delta contactors mounting joined side by side - Downstream side.
– The necessary elements to create the star point upstream of the star contactor.
Alternatively BED 16 … BED 75 connection sets suitable for mechanically interlocked star and delta contactors
BED 40
may be supplied if required.
BED 16-1 - BED 26-1 - Insulated, solid copper wires.
BED 40-1 - Insulated, stranded solid copper wires.
BED 50-1, BED 75-1 - Solid copper bars and insulated stranded copper wires.
5
BED 95 - BED 110 - Insulated, solid copper bars.
1 3
BED 145 - BSD 210 - BSD 300 - Insulated, flexible copper bars.
BSD 550 - BSD 800 - Bare, solid copper bars.
The above BED 95 … BSD 800 connection sets allow a mechanical interlock unit to be mounted between the
star and delta contactors if required.
E1143D
Ordering details
BED 75-1 Type Order code Mounting on contactors Packing Weight
Line and Delta Star set kg
BED 16-1 1SBN 08 1403 R1001 A9 A9
A 12 A9 1 0.040
A 16 A 12
BED 26-1 1SBN 08 2403 R1001 A 26 A 16 1 0.050
BED 40-1 1SBN 08 2803 R1001 A 30 A 26 1 0.070
A 40 A 26
A 854D
Plates for:
EH 145 to EH 800 3-Pole Contactors
EK 110 to EK 550 4-Pole Contactors
Description
The range is made up of plates for one contactor only, for two horizontal mounted contactors or for two vertical
mounted contactors and which may be combined with a thermal O/L relay (see section 5) for starters or with
other accessories such as, for example, a mechanical interlock unit (see page 4/10) for reversing contactors.
Ordering details
● Plates for two horizontal mounted contactors with or without a mechanical interlock unit and/or
thermal O/L relay.
Type Order code to use with: Packing Weight
(1) To mount the thermal O/L relay, use the additional PR 450-9A plate below.
Plate
●Plates for two horizontal mounted contactors without mechanical interlock unit and/or thermal
O/L relay.
Type Order code to use with: Packing Weight
● Additional plates for mounting a thermal O/L relay on a main plate holding the contactors.
Type Order code to use with: Packing Weight
thermal O/L relay main plate piece
PR 450-9A SK 829 073-A T 450 DU PN 300-22 1 0.180
PR 900-9A SK 829 073-B T 450 DU, T 900 DU PN 550-21, plate 1 0.800
supplied with the
VH 550 interlocking
PR 900-9B SK 829 073-C T 900 DU PN 800-22, plate 1 0.960
supplied with the
VH 800 interlocking
Plates for:
EH 145 to EH 800 3-Pole Contactors
EK 110 to EK 550 4-Pole Contactors
Dimensions in mm
280
260 5
160
195
E0749D2
E0749D1
ø 6.8
PN 145-21
430 3
340
400
320 5
200
230
180
200
ø 15
4
E0748D1G
E0748D2
E0750D2
E0750D1
Additional plate
ø 6.8 PR 450-9A
PN 210-22 PN 300-22
580 46
480 46 550
450
295
265
295
265
452.5
417.5
ø 15
ø 15
E0752D1G
E0752D2
E0751D2
E0751D1G
Additional plate
Additional plate PR 900-9B
PR 900-9A
PN 550-21 PN 800-22
ø7
ø7
429
415
323
310
E0754D1
E0754D2
E0753D2
E0753D1
PN 300-11A PN 700-11
Arc Chutes
Ordering details
Type Order code for contactors Packing Weight
set kg
KW 145 5223 351-V EH 145 1 0.395
KW 175 5223 351-AD EH 175 1 0.820
KW 210 5223 351-AE EH 210 1 0.820
KW 260 5223 351-AF EH 260 1 1.070
KW 300 5223 351-AG EH 300 1 1.070
KW 370 5223 351-L EH 370 1 2.360
KW 550 5223 351-M EH 550 1 2.360
SB 7602S4
Contactor Coils
Coils only
KBC 30 G ■ GJL 200 1530 R ■ 46 ■ KC and BC 9 to BC 30 1 0.170
ZAE 75 ■ 1SBN 15 3590 R ■ ■ 06 AE 45 to AE 75 ; GAE 75 1 0.170
ZAE 110 ■ 1SFN 15 4390 R ■ ■ 06 AE 95 and AE 110 1 0.195
Auxiliary device including an insertion contact and a varistor
CDL 5-01 1SBN 01 3522 R1001 AE 45 to AE 75 1 0.040
CCL 5-01 1SFN 01 4321 R1001 AE 95 and AE 110 1 0.040
Contactor Coils
Sets including a multi-frequency coil and an insertion contact for contactor with built-in rectifier
KP 210 ■ SK 825 450 - E ■ EH 175, 210 ; EK 110, 150 1 set 0.300
A_088
KH 550 - KH 800
A.C. and D.C. Operated Coils for the Mechanical Latching Units
on EH 145 to EH 800 Contactors
Coils
Type Order code for contactors Packing Weight
state coil to be completed with
voltage: ■ coil voltage code: - ■ ■
A_083
Ordering details:
Technical Data:
Types TA 25 DU TA 42 DU TA 75 DU TA 80 DU
Main Characteristics
Construction 3-pole with ambient temperature variation compensation.
Protection against single-phase operation. Built-in auxiliary contacts: 1N.O. + 1N.C.
A 310
Resetting Convertible: Manual Automatic
Setting ranges Number 18 3 6 4
from 0.1 - 0.16 A 18 - 25 A 18 - 25 A 29 - 42 A
to 24 - 32 A 29 - 42 A 60 - 80 A 60 - 80 A
A 324
Convertible: Manual Automatic
2 4 4 4
65 - 90 A 100 - 135 A 130 - 185 A 265 - 375 A
80 - 110 A 150 - 200 A 285 - 400 A 610 - 850 A
No kit is required for mounting thermal O/L relays below contactors AT 450/EH - see accessories AT 900/EH -
page 5/7
A 95 AE 95
A 110 AE 110
EH 145
EH 175 EH 175 + AT 450/EH 160
EH 210 EH 210 + AT 450/EH 160
EH 260 + AT 450/EH 300
EH 300 + AT 450/EH 300
EH 370 + AT 450/EH 370 EH 370 + AT 900/EH 370/550
EH 550 + AT 900/EH 550
EH 700 + AT 900/EH 700
EH 800 + AT 900/EH 800
BA 5-50
T 450 SU T 900 SU
TA 110 DU - V 1000 T 200 DU - V 1000 T 450 DU - V 1000 T 900 DU - V 1000
● Technical Data .................................................. pages 5/10 - 5/18 ● Terminal Marking and Positioning ............................... section 8
● General - Approvals ....................................................... section 7 ● Dimensions .................................................................... section 9
TA 110 DU TA 110 DU - V 1000 (EEx e) for A 95, A 110, AE 95 and AE 110 contactors
TA 110 DU 90 V 1000 1SAZ 41 1301 R1001 65 - 90 160 200 1 0.750
TA 110 DU 110 V 1000 1SAZ 41 1301 R1002 80 - 110 200 224 1 0.750
T 200 DU
● Technical Data ................................................. pages 5/10 - 5/18 ● Terminal Marking and Positioning ............................... section 8
● General - Approvals ....................................................... section 7 ● Dimensions .................................................................... section 9
T 450 DU for EH 175…EH 370 contactors - Order AT 450… kit: page 5/7
T 450 DU 185 GJZ 542 1001 R 0001 130 - 185 355 1 1.500
T 450 DU 235 GJZ 542 1001 R 0002 165 - 235 400 1 1.500
T 450 DU 310 GJZ 542 1001 R 0003 220 - 310 500 1 1.500
SB 6570
T 450 DU 400 GJZ 542 1001 R 0004 285 - 400 630 1 1.500
T 450 DU / SU T 450 DU - V 1000 (EEx e) for EH 175…EH 370 contactors - Order AT 450… kit: page 5/7
T 450 DU 185 V 1000 GJZ 543 1001 R 0001 130 - 185 355 1 1.500
T 450 DU 235 V 1000 GJZ 543 1001 R 0002 165 - 235 400 1 1.500
T 450 DU 310 V 1000 GJZ 543 1001 R 0003 220 - 310 500 1 1.500
T 450 DU 400 V 1000 GJZ 543 1001 R 0004 285 - 400 630 1 1.500
T 450 SU for EH 175…EH 370 contactors - Order AT 450… kit: page 5/7
T 450 SU 60 GJZ 552 1001 R 0005 40 - 60 125 1 0.700
T 450 SU 80 GJZ 552 1001 R 0006 55 - 80 160 1 0.700
T 450 SU 105 GJZ 552 1001 R 0007 70 - 105 200 1 0.700
T 450 SU 140 GJZ 552 1001 R 0008 95 - 140 315 1 0.700
T 450 SU 185 GJZ 552 1001 R 0001 130 - 185 355 1 0.700
T 450 SU 235 GJZ 552 1001 R 0002 165 - 235 400 1 0.700
T 450 SU 310 GJZ 552 1001 R 0003 220 - 310 500 1 0.700
SB 6569
T 450 SU 400 GJZ 552 1001 R 0004 285 - 400 630 1 0.700
T 900 DU / SU T 450 SU - V 1000 (EEx e) for EH 175…EH 370 contactors - Order AT 450… kit: page 5/7
T 450 SU 60 V 1000 GJZ 553 1001 R 0005 40 - 60 125 1 0.700
T 450 SU 80 V 1000 GJZ 553 1001 R 0006 55 - 80 160 1 0.700
T 450 SU 105 V 1000 GJZ 553 1001 R 0007 70 - 105 200 1 0.700
T 450 SU 140 V 1000 GJZ 553 1001 R 0008 95 - 140 315 1 0.700
T 450 SU 185 V 1000 GJZ 553 1001 R 0001 130 - 185 355 1 0.700
T 450 SU 235 V 1000 GJZ 553 1001 R 0002 165 - 235 400 1 0.700
T 450 SU 310 V 1000 GJZ 553 1001 R 0003 220 - 310 500 1 0.700
T 450 SU 400 V 1000 GJZ 553 1001 R 0004 285 - 400 630 1 0.700
T 900 DU for EH 370…EH 800 contactors - Order AT 900… kit: page 5/7
T 900 DU 375 GJZ 602 1001 R 0001 265 - 375 500 1 3.000
T 900 DU 500 GJZ 602 1001 R 0002 355 - 500 800 1 3.000
T 900 DU 650 GJZ 602 1001 R 0003 465 - 650 1000 1 3.000
T 900 DU 850 GJZ 602 1001 R 0004 610 - 850 1250 1 3.000
T 900 DU - V 1000 (EEx e) for EH 370…EH 800 contactors - Order AT 900… kit: page 5/7
T 900 DU 375 V 1000 GJZ 603 1001 R 0001 265 - 375 500 1 3.000
T 900 DU 500 V 1000 GJZ 603 1001 R 0002 355 - 500 800 1 3.000
T 900 DU 650 V 1000 GJZ 603 1001 R 0003 465 - 650 1000 1 3.000
T 900 DU 850 V 1000 GJZ 603 1001 R 0004 610 - 850 1250 1 3.000
T 900 SU for EH 370…EH 800 contactors - Order AT 900… kit: page 5/7
T 900 SU 375 GJZ 612 1001 R 0001 265 - 375 500 1 1.500
T 900 SU 500 GJZ 612 1001 R 0002 355 - 500 800 1 1.500
T 900 SU 650 GJZ 612 1001 R 0003 465 - 650 1000 1 1.500
T 900 SU 850 GJZ 612 1001 R 0004 610 - 850 1250 1 1.500
T 900 SU - V 1000 (EEx e) for EH 370…EH 800 contactors - Order AT 900… kit: page 5/7
T 900 SU 375 V 1000 GJZ 613 1001 R 0001 265 - 375 500 1 1.500
T 900 SU 500 V 1000 GJZ 613 1001 R 0002 355 - 500 800 1 1.500
T 900 SU 650 V 1000 GJZ 613 1001 R 0003 465 - 650 1000 1 1.500
T 900 SU 850 V 1000 GJZ 613 1001 R 0004 610 - 850 1250 1 1.500
● Technical Data .................................................. pages 5/10 - 5/18 ● Terminal Marking and Positioning ............................... section 8
● General - Approvals ....................................................... section 7 ● Dimensions .................................................................... section 9
SST 182 91 R
T450 DU/SU and T900 DU/SU to be combined with contactors require an additional mounting kit.
Description
LC terminal blocks can be used to transform standard connections into Faston connections:
DB 200
2 x 6.3 mm or 4 x 2.8 mm per pole. The connections are protected against accidental contact.
The LC 30-T has a first terminal block for the 3 power terminals and a second for the 4 auxiliary terminals of
a TA 25 DU thermal O/L relay.
The LC 26-B1 has two identical terminal blocks each for 3 power terminals. This block allows the power
terminals to be fitted with two DB 25 kits or a TA 25 DU thermal O/L relay and DB 25 kit assembly.
According to DIN 46429 part 1 and NFC 20-120 the max. capacity of a Faston connection is 25 A.
!
Ordering Details
Type Order code Mounting on: Packing Weight
in
kg
A 067
DB 25/25 A
DX 25
Application
– The DS 25-A coil is used for remote electrical tripping of the TA 25 DU thermal O/L relay.
The DS 25-A coil is connected to the relay's normally closed 95-96 auxiliary contact.
– The DR 25-A coil is used for remote electrical resetting of the TA 25 DU thermal O/L relay which is
adjusted for "Manual resetting".
The DR 25-A coil is connected to the relay's normally open 97-98 auxiliary contact.
SST 205 91 R
The coils are not designed for continuous duty. Impulse duration: 0.2 to 0.35 s.
Set the button to "Man" (Manual resetting).
DS 25 A
Mounting: clipped on to TA 25 DU thermal O/L relay.
Ordering Details
Type Order code Uc voltage Packing Weight
at 50/60 Hz in
pieces kg
Installation diagram
For connection of DS 25-A to TA 25 DU relay For connection of DR 25-A to TA 25 DU relay
ABB 86 6680/1S
ABB 86 6679/1S
ABB 86 6679/2S
ABB 86 6680/2S
Ordering Details
Type Order code Mounted on: Packing Weight
in
set kg
SST 289 92 R
LT 200 /160 GJZ 430 1907 R0001 T 200 DU + EH 145 /175 / 210 1 0.150
LT 450 /250 GJZ 520 1930 R0001 T 450 DU/SU + EH 175 / 210 /260 / 300 1 0.310
LT 450 /370 GJZ 520 1932 R0002 T 450 DU/SU + EH 370 1 0.410
LT …
LT 900 /700 GJZ 520 1935 R0002 T 900 DU/SU + EH 370/550/700 1 0.450
LT 900/800 GJZ 520 1937 R0002 T 900 DU/SU + EH 800 1 0.600
Ordering Details
SB 7587S4
OXFB 150
Application
TA and T thermal O/L relays are used with A, BC, AE and EH contactors for the protection of motors having
a nominal voltage of up to 690 V a.c. and 800 V d.c.
Product Range
● Standard Relays:
Types: TA 25 DU, TA 42 DU, TA 75 DU, TA 80 DU, TA 110 DU, T 200 DU, T 450 DU/SU and T 900 DU/SU
– TA 25 to TA 110 and T 200 are directly connected in the motor circuit.
– T 450 DU and T 900 DU relays are fed through a linear type transformer.
– T 450 SU and T 900 SU are fed through a saturable transformer and consequently have a longer tripping time.
See page 5/11, "Protection of Motors with Long Starting Time".
● Special Construction
Thermal O/L relays with different certifications and approvals, see page 7/5.
Relays for protection of EEx e motors, see page 5/11.
● General
Thermal O/L relays and their accessories meet the most important international standards (IEC),
TA 25 DU European standards (EN) and the most important national standards (DIN-VDE, NFC-UTE, BS, etc.).
They meet the certification and approval directives required throughout the world.
Thermal O/L relays are 3-pole.
The motor current flows through their bimetals (1 per phase) which are thus indirectly heated. Under the effect
of the heating, the bimetals bend, cause the relay to trip and the position of the auxiliary contacts to change.
The relay setting range is graduated in amps. In compliance with international and national standards, the
setting current is the motor nominal current and not the tripping current (no tripping at 1.05 x setting current,
tripping at 1.2 times setting current).
The tripping curves (cold or warm starting, 3 phases and 2 phases) are shown on page 5/17.
The relays are built to be self-protecting in the event of an overload until the short-circuit protection device, as
specified in the association tables, is activated.
Technical Data
All the relays have:
– Free tripping: the resetting button, even if held in, does not prevent tripping of the thermal O/L relay in the
event of a fault.
– Temperature compensation: see page 5/11
– Phase failure protection according to IEC 947-4-1: Within the limits of the setting range a reduced tripping
time, and thus improved motor protection, is obtained in case of a phase failure.
– Tripping class (see page 7/8): 10 A, for TA and T - DU relays
30, for T - SU relays
– Test functions and resetting, see table below.
Auxiliary contacts
The relays have two built-in auxiliary contacts: N.C. marked 95 – 96
N.O. marked 97 – 98
Both contacts are physically separate and can thus be used for 2 different circuits (control circuit, indication
circuit).
● Switching Frequency:
Intermittent duty To avoid untimely tripping, TA and T thermal O/L relays have been designed to withstand roughly 15 switching
operations per hour with an approximately equal distribution between working and rest cycles.
In these conditions, the motor starting time must not exceed 1 second and the starting current must be lower
(ops./h) than or equal to 6 times the motor In.
For intermittent operations, the diagram opposite specifies relay operating limits.
Example: Motor starting time: ......................... 1 sec.
Switching frequency
● Mounting position
On a support at an angle of ± 30° in relation to the vertical plane (standard position).
Other mounting positions possible, except mounting on a horizontal plane (in this case the tripping
mechanism would be located above the bimetals).
with the normal version, special versions for EEx e motors have the following features:
Multiple of the setting current – special in-factory tripping time test
– special ordering details
The tripping curves for individual setting ranges as well as the PTB approval certificates are available on
TA - and T - thermal O/L request.
relay cold-state tripping
PTB numbers:
characteristics
Type PTB Numbers Type PTB Numbers
TA 25 DU…V1000 being prepared T450 DU, T900 DU…V1000 3.53/38 1.671
TA 75 DU, TA 80 DU, TA 110 DU…V1000 being prepared T450 SU, T900 SU…V1000 3.53/38 1.672
T200 DU…V1000 3.53-5315/ 93
Thermal O/L relays are designed to operate between –5 °C and +40 °C in compliance
Tripping with standard IEC 947-4-1. For a wider range of –25° C to +55 °C consult the graph
opposite.
Example: tripping at – 25 °C. Tripping takes place before 1.5 times the setting current.
No tripping
Resetting: TA 25 DU – T900 DU/SU thermal O/L relays have convertible manual/
automatic resetting.
SST 085 92 K
Critical direction A1
of shocks A1, A2 multiples of g 12
Resistance to vibrations
(±1 mm, 50 Hz) multiples of g 8
Mounting – on contactor Latching below the contactor, screw fixing on main terminals
– separate with DB - kit Using screws: 2 x M4 or 35 mm EN 50022
Terminals and cross-sectional areas TA25DU setting ranges:
for main conductors (motor side) from 0.1-0.16 A
24-32 A
● screw terminal to 18-25 A
– with cable clamp M4 –
– via tunnel connector – M5 M6 M6 M6
– flat type for lug or bar – – – – –
● conductor cross-sectional area
– rigid solid or rigid stranded mm2 2 x 1.5 - 6 1 x 10 1 x 2.5 - 35 or 2 x 2.5 x 16
– flexible with cable end mm2 2 x 1.5 - 4 2 x 0.75- 6 1 x 2.5 - 25 or 2 x 2.5 x 10
– recommended bars mm – – – – –
Terminals and cross-sectional area
for auxiliary conductors
● screw terminal (screw size)
– with cable clamp M 3.5
● conductor cross-sectional area
– rigid solid or rigid stranded 2 x mm2 0.75 - 4
– flexible with cable end 2 x mm2 0.75 - 2.5
Degree of protection All the terminals are protected against direct contact according to see page
VDE 0106/Part. 100. (without additional terminal shrouds) opposite
see section 7
V 690 1000
kV 6 8
°C –40 to +70
°C –25 to +55 with temperature compensation (maximum values: see page 5/11)
Humidity in alternate climate KFW, 30 cycles
On a support at an angle of ±30° in relation to the vertical plane (standard position). Other mounting positions
possible, except mounting on a horizontal plane (in this case the tripping mechanism would be located above the bimetals).
ms 15
xg 12
xg 8
4 x M5 screws 4 x M6 screws
HC, M8 – – –
5
– M10 M10 M10
M 3.5
2 x mm2 0.75 - 4
2 x mm2 0.75 - 2.5
All the terminals are protected against direct contact according to VDE 0106/Part. 100.
(with additional terminal shrouds for the main terminals)
Motor Protection
Choice of Protective Device
SST 081 91 M2
SST 081 91 M1
SST 081 91 M3
SST 081 91 M4
SPEM
M M M M
3~ 3~ 3~ 3~
A A
Resistance
per phase
mΩ
Joule losses
per phase
W
5
18 - 25 5.5 3.43
22 - 32 2.89 2.91
29 - 42 1.84 3.24
SB 6569
SB 7361
SB 7386
SB 7029
TA 25 DU TA 75 DU T 200 DU T900 DU
TA-DU and T-DU thermal O/L relays are 3-pole with manual or automatic resetting mode selection.
The resetting button can also be used for stopping.
Built-in auxiliary contacts are physically separate and, consequently, can be used in different circuits (control circuit/indication circuit).
Each relay is temperature compensated and ensures phase failure protection.
Protective relays up to size TA 75 DU are protected against direct contact via the front face. Terminal shrouds are available for T 200 DU to
T 900 DU/SU size relays.
The connecting terminals are delivered in open position with (+,-) pozidriv screws and screwdriver guidance. It is advisable to tighten unused terminal
screws.
20 20 20
10 10 10
5
8 8 8
6 6 from cold state 6
4 4 4
Minutes
Minutes
Minutes
Tripping time
Tripping time
2 Phases
1 1 1 2 Phases
40 2 Phases 40 3 Phases 40
3 Phases
20 20 20
Seconds
2 Phases
Second
Seconds
3 Phases
10 10
3 Phases
10 2 Phases 3 Phases
8 8 8
6 6 6
4 3 Phases 4 4 2 Phases
from warm state
SST 0003 90 K
SST 005 90 K
2 2 2
from warm state
91 A 383
from warm state
1 1 1
0.8 1 1.2 1.5 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 0.8 1 1.2 1.5 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 0.8 1 1.2 1.5 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
20 20 20
10 10 10
8 8 8
6 6 6
4 4 4
Minutes
Minutes
Minutes
Tripping time
Tripping time
Seconds
3 Phases 2 Phases
10 10 10
8 8 2 Phases 8
6 6 6
4 2 Phases 3 Phases
4 4
3 Phases
SST 031 99 K
91 A 385
1 1 1
0.8 1 1.2 1.5 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 0.8 1 1.2 1.5 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 0.8 1 1.2 1.5 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Ordering Details
Electronic O/L relay Order code Setting Associated Packing Weight
range max. fuse in
aM gG(gl)
Type A … A A A pieces kg
20
3 phases
10
8
6
from cold state
5
4
Minutes
Class 30
Tripping time
1
40
Class 20
20
Seconds
Class 10
10
8
6
4
SST23598GB
1
0,8 1 1,2 1,5 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Tripping current
in multiples of the setting current
PTB
UL CSA Ex "e"* GL LRS BV DNV
USA Canada Germany Germany Great Britain France Norway
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
■ Standard design approved ; identification plates bear the approval mark if it is mandatory.
■ Submitted to approval.
* Protection of explosion protected motors (EN 50019) class Ex "e" according to DIN VDE 0165/02.91.
Contents
Ordering Details
Technical Data
Additional Information
Soldering pin connection, a.c. control circuit 3.5 VA, Ith < 8 A
SST 159 91 R
Soldering pin connection, a.c. control circuit 3.5 VA, Ith < 8 A
B 7-30-10-P GJL 131 1009 R ■ 10 ■ 1 – 3.0 5.5 10 0.170
B 7-40-00
B 7-30-01-P GJL 131 1009 R ■ 01 ■ – 1 10 0.170
BBC 89 6136
The VB 6 and VB 7 type allows fast reversing to be carried out. However, the first contactor's opening process must be
completed before the second contactor receives the order to close. Electrical interlocking must be used for this.
In the VB 6A and VB 7A type there is safety locking to prevent short circuits which would cause an excessively fast reversing
order. As soon as this premature control signal is withdrawn, locking is automatically cancelled. De-energization of the coils
On switching, the coils of the 2 for a period of 50 ms ensures that safety locking is not activated.
VB 6A and VB 7A contactors
must be de-energized for more
than 50 ms. Ordering Details, VB 6, VBC 6 Compact Reversing Contactors
Type Order code Mounted Motor power AC-2, AC-3 Packing Weight
to be completed with coil aux. cont. 220 V 380 V in
voltage code ■ .. ■ 240 V 440 V
see page 6/1 kW kW pieces kg
Soldering pin connection, a.c. control circuit 3.5 VA, Ith < 8 A
VB 6-30-01 VB 6-30-10-P GJL 121 1909 R ■ 10 ■ 1 – 2.2 4 5 0.340
VB 6-30-01-P GJL 121 1909 R ■ 01 ■ – 1 5 0.340
Soldering pin connection, a.c. control circuit 3.5 VA, Ith < 8 A
VB 7-30-10-P GJL 131 1909 R ■ 10 ■ 1 – 3.0 5.5 5 0.340
VB 7-30-01-P GJL 131 1909 R ■ 01 ■ – 1 5 0.340
VB 7-30-01
Screw connection, d.c. control circuit 3.5 W
VBC 7-30-10 GJL 131 3901 R ■ 10 ■ 1 – 3.0 5.5 5 0.340
VBC 7-30-01 GJL 131 3901 R ■ 01 ■ – 1 5 0.340
Soldering pin connection, a.c. control circuit 3.5 VA, Ith < 8 A
VB 6A-30-10-P GJL 121 1919 R ■ 10 ■ 1 – 2.2 4 5 0.340
VB 6A-30-01-P GJL 121 1919 R ■ 01 ■ – 1 5 0.340
1 – 2.2 4 5 0.340
VBC 6A-30-01-F GJL 121 3913 R ■ 01 ■ – 1 5 0.340
Soldering pin connection, a.c. control circuit 3.5 VA, Ith < 8 A
VB 7A-30-10-P GJL 131 1919 R ■ 10 ■ 1 – 3.0 5.5 5 0.340
VB 7A-30-01-P GJL 131 1919 R ■ 01 ■ – 1 5 0.340
B6 S and B7 S Mini Contactors with built-in surge suppressor for use on PLC outputs.
Do not add auxiliary contact blocks!
-1000 V
Mini contactors directly operated by PLC's; protection via built-in diodes and add-on surge suppressors; coil
0 280 µs
connection with polarizing slot; T7DU thermal O/L relay can be added (see page 6/17).
BC 6 and BC 7 without surge suppressor.
Screw connection, d.c. control circuit 24 V/1.7 W
B6 S-30-10-1.7 GJL 121 3001 R 7101 1 – 2.2 4.0 10 0.180
B6 S-30-01-1.7 GJL 121 3001 R 7011 – 1 2.2 4.0 10 0.180
SST 016 91 K
24 V
0
Screw connection, d.c. control circuit 17 - 32 V/2.8 W
B6 S-30-10-2.8 GJL 121 3001 R 7102 1 – 2.2 4.0 10 0.180
0
Interruption
B6 S-30-01-2.8 GJL 121 3001 R 7012 – 1 2.2 4.0 10 0.180
KC 6-Interface
K 6, KC 6 Mini Contactor Relays and K6 S for PLC's
Ordering Details
K 6 and KC 6 Mini Contactor Relays
Type Order code Mounted AC-15 Packing Weight
to be completed with coil aux. cont. 220 V 380 V 500 V in
voltage code ■ .. ■ 240 V 440 V
see page 6/1 A A A pieces kg
-1000 V
0 280 µs K6 S Mini Contactor Relays with built-in surge suppressor for use on PLC outputs.
KC 6 without surge suppressor. Do not add auxiliary contact blocks!
Mini contactors directly operated by PLC's; protection via built-in diodes and add-on surge suppressors; coil
connection with polarizing slot.
SST 016 91 K
24 V
0 Screw connection, d.c. control circuit 24 V/1.7 W
K6 S-40 E-1.7 GJH 121 3001 R 7401 4 – 4 3 2 10 0.180
K6 S-31 Z-1.7 GJH 121 3001 R 7311 3 1 4 3 2 10 0.180
0
Interruption K6 S-22 Z-1.7 GJH 121 3001 R 7221 2 2 4 3 2 10 0.180
K6 S with built-in surge suppressor. Screw connection, d.c. control circuit 17 - 32 V/2.8 W
K6 S-40 E-2.8 GJH 121 3001 R 7402 4 – 4 3 2 10 0.180
K6 S-31 Z-2.8 GJH 121 3001 R 7312 3 1 4 3 2 10 0.180
K6 S-22 Z-2.8 GJH 121 3001 R 7222 2 2 4 3 2 10 0.180
Accessories
for Mini Contactors
Ordering Details
Type Order code Mounted For mounting on Packing Weight
aux. cont. in
pieces kg
Side-mounted auxiliary contact blocks CA 6 and CAF 6 auxiliary contact blocks must not be mounted simultaneously.
SST 162 91 R
Screw terminals
CA 6-11K GJL 120 1317 R 0001 1 1 K6- and KC6- 10 0.030
CA 6-11E GJL 120 1317 R 0002 1 1 B6(7)-40-00; BC6(7)-40-00 10 0.030
CA 6-11M GJL 120 1317 R 0003 1 1 B6(7)-30-10; BC6(7)-30-10 10 0.030
CA 6-11N GJL 120 1317 R 0004 1 1 B6(7)-30-01; BC6(7)-30-01 10 0.030
Flat pin terminals
CA 6-11K-F GJL 120 1318 R 0001 1 1 K6-F ; KC6-F 10 0.030
CA 6-11E-F GJL 120 1318 R 0002 1 1 B6(7)-40-00-F; BC6(7)-40-00-F 10 0.030
SST 163 91 R
Front-mounted auxiliary contact blocks CA 6 and CAF 6 auxiliary contact blocks must not be mounted simultaneously.
Screw terminals
CAF 6- 11K GJL 120 1330 R 0001 1 1 K 6 and KC 6 10 0.035
CA 6-11K CAF 6- 20K GJL 120 1330 R 0005 2 – K 6 and KC 6 10 0.035
CA 6-11E-F CAF 6- 02K GJL 120 1330 R 0009 – 2 K 6 and KC 6 10 0.035
CA 6-11M-P
CAF 6- 11E GJL 120 1330 R 0002 1 1 B(C)6- to B(C)7-40-00, VB(C)…(A) 10 0.035
CAF 6- 20E GJL 120 1330 R 0006 2 – B(C)6- to B(C)7-40-00, VB(C)…(A) 10 0.035
CAF 6- 02E GJL 120 1330 R 0010 – 2 B(C)6- to B(C)7-40-00, VB(C)…(A) 10 0.035
CAF 6- 11M GJL 120 1330 R 0003 1 1 B(C)6- to B(C)7-30-10, VB(C)…(A) 10 0.035
CAF 6- 20M GJL 120 1330 R 0007 2 – B(C)6- to B(C)7-30-10, VB(C)…(A) 10 0.035
SST 011 93 R
CAF 6- 02M GJL 120 1330 R 0011 – 2 B(C)6- to B(C)7-30-10, VB(C)…(A) 10 0.035
CAF 6- 11N GJL 120 1330 R 0004 1 1 B(C)6- to B(C)7-30-01, VB(C)…(A) 10 0.035
CAF 6- 20N GJL 120 1330 R 0008 2 – B(C)6- to B(C)7-30-01, VB(C)…(A) 10 0.035
CAF 6- 11M CAF 6- 02N GJL 120 1330 R 0012 – 2 B(C)6- to B(C)7-30-01, VB(C)…(A) 10 0.035
Plunger 6
BN 6 GJL 120 1904 R 0001 - for manual operation 50 0.060
RV-BC 6/-
Varistor-type
surge suppressor Function marker
BA 5-50 1SBN 11 0000R 1000 - 50 clip-on label holders 1 box 0.017
Effective surface 7 x 19 mm
For writing details in ball-point pen,
indelible felt-tip or pentel white
RV-BC6-F/60 GHV 250 1902 R 0003 - 24–60 V for 2.8 mm flat pin terminals 10 0.004
RV-BC6/250 GHV 250 1903 R 0002 - 50–250 V with forked terminal 10 0.004
RV-BC6-F/250 GHV 250 1903 R 0003 - 50–250 V for 2.8 mm flat pin terminals 10 0.004
LT 6-B Protective cover RV-BC6/380 GHV 250 1904 R 0002 - 380 V with forked terminal 10 0.004
RV-BC6-F/380 GHV 250 1904 R 0003 - 380 V for 2.8 mm flat pin terminals 10 0.004
BSM 6-30 GJL 120 1908 R 0001 - for VB- VBC- compact reversing 10 0.010
contactors with screw terminal
and 1.8 mm2 cross-sectional area
Application
TBC 7 mini contactors and TKC 6 mini contactor relays with large coil voltage range are designed to operate
in control circuits characterised by large voltage variations.
Example: storage batteries.
Ordering Details
TBC 7 Mini Contactors
Coil operating limits: Type Order code Mounted Motor power AC-2, AC-3 Packing Weight
to be completed with coil aux. cont. 220 V 380 V 500 V in
Voltage V d.c. Code
voltage code: ■ ..■ 240 V 440 V
min. Uc max. R ■ . . ■
See table opposite kW kW kW pieces kg
17 ........ 32 ■
5 ■1
50 ........ 90 ■
5 ■5 Screw connection
77 ...... 143 ■
6 ■2
Screw connection
TKC 6-22 Z GJH 121 3061 R ■ 22 ■ 2 2 4 3 2 10 0.180
TKC 6-31 Z GJH 121 3061 R ■ 31 ■ 3 1 4 3 2 10 0.180
TKC 6- 40 E GJH 121 3061 R ■ 40 ■ 4 – 4 3 2 10 0.180
Coil characteristics
! No extra tolerances applicable to the Uc min. - max. values quoted in the table above (top left).
Technical Data
Identical to the data for BC 7 and KC 6 standard mini contactors (see following pages), except:
Permissible surrounding temperatures:
with own heating °C –30 to +55
without own heating °C –30 to +70
storage temperature °C –40 to +85
Addition of Accessories
CA 6 or CAF 6 auxiliary contact blocks must not be added.
!
AC-1/AC-3 Utilization Categories General Technical Data according to IEC 947-4-1, IEC 947-5-1
Electrical durability curves
B 6, BC 6, B6 S Rated insulation voltage Ui V 690
Air temperature close to contactor
10 – fitted with a thermal O/L relay °C – 25 to + 50
°C
8
6 – without thermal O/L relay – 25 to + 55
°C
5
4 – for storage – 40 to + 80
3
1
0.8 Mounting positions all positions
0.6
0.5
0.4 Mechanical durability 10 million operating cycles
0.3
0.05
0.04
0.03
AC-3 AC-1
Rated operational current Ie/AC-1, AC-3 AC-1/Ie (A) AC-2, AC-3
55 °C 40 °C
0.02
Rated operational power at: Ie (A) P (kW)
0.01 220-240 V 16 20 9 2.2
1 1.5 2 3 4 5 6 8 10 15 20 30
380-440 V 16 20 9/8 4.0
Rated operational current Ie (A)
500 V 12 12 5.5 3.0
Shock withstand see table page 6/10
AC-4 Utilization category
Cage motors: starting, plugging, inching Operating time B6 BC6 K6 KC6
The breaking current Ic is equal Between coil energization and:
to 6 x Ie motor rated operational current. - N.O. contact closing/N.C. contact opening ms 14 - 26 14 - 26 14 - 26 14 - 26
10
8 Between coil de-energization and:
6
5 - N.O. contact opening/N.C. contact closing ms 16 - 40 4 - 10 16 - 40 4 - 10
4
3 Heat dissipation per pole 2 W at 20 A
2
AC-4 Short-circuit protection
Millions of operating cycles
0.04
0.03
Rated operational current Ie/ AC-15
0.02
220-240 V A 4
0.01 380-440 V A 3
1 1.5 2 3 4 5 6 8 10 15 20 30 500 V A 2
Breaking current Ic (A)
Rated operational current Ie/ DC-13
AC-15 Utilization category 24 V A 1.5
Electrical durability curve 60 V A 0.5
K6, KC6, CA6, CAF6 110 V A 0.4
10 220-240 V A 0.04
Min. switching capacity of auxiliary contacts > 17 V and > 5 mA
5
0.1
B 6 S-1.7, KS 6-1.7 d.c. 24 V W 77 1.75 60 1.35
0.01 0.02 0.05 0.1 0.2 0.5 1 2 3 5 10 B 6 S-2.8, K6 S-2.8 d.c. 17 - 32 V W 125 2.80 94 2.10
Breaking current (A)
Coil operating limits 0.85 - 1.1x Uc
1
0.8 Mounting positions all positions
0.6
0.5
0.4 Mechanical durability 10 million operating cycles
0.3
0.2
Max. electrical switching frequency
AC-1 cycles/h 300
0.1 DC-1, DC-3, DC-5, AC-2, AC-3, AC-15, DC-13 cycles/h 600
0.08
0.06
0.05
Rated operational voltage Ue V a.c. 12 - 500
SST 209 93 K/GB
0.04
0.03 Rated operational current Ie/AC-1, AC-3 AC-1/Ie (A) AC-2, AC-3
AC-3 AC-1
55 °C 40 °C
0.02
Rated operational power at: Ie (A) P (kW)
0.01
1 1.5 2 3 4 5 6 8 10 15 20 30
220-240 V 16 20 12/11 3
Rated operational current Ie (A) 380-440 V 16 20 12/11 5.5
500 V 12 12 7 4
Shock withstand 1/2 sinusoidal shock for 10 ms:
AC-4 Utilization category
Cage motors: starting, plugging, inching
standard mounting position: position 1 no change in contact position
C1
The breaking current Ic is equal
to 6 x Ie motor rated operational current.
B1
1L1 3L2 5L3 13NO shock directions A B1 B2 C1 C2
A A1 A
10
0
A2 making position 20 g 20 g 20 g 20 g 20 g
8 B2
A 394
6T3 14NO
2T1 4T2
6
5 C2
breaking position 10 g 20 g 20 g 20 g 20 g
4
3 Operating time B7 BC7
2
Millions of operating cycles
0.04
0.03 type 2 20 A
0.02
0.01
1 1.5 2 3 4 5 6 8 10 15 20 30
Breaking current (A)
Technical Data of built-in auxiliary contacts
Min. switching capacity of
auxiliary contacts > 17 V and > 5 mA
AC-15 Utilization category
Electrical durability curve
K6, KC6, CA6, CAF6
10 Technical Data of magnet system
Coil consumption (average value)
5 Standard contactors pull-in/holding
B 7 / VB 7 a.c. VA 3.5
Millions of operating cycles
0.1
0.01 0.02 0.05 0.1 0.2 0.5 1 2 3 5 10
Breaking current (A)
If one single pole is used, the corresponding breaking capacity (W) is reduced to 1/3 and for 2 poles connected in series it is reduced to 2/3.
6
89 6151/1 + 2
For these reasons, the values in the following tables are given for information only.
Type of lamps Characteristics Number of lamps Capacitive Type of lamps Characteristics Number of lamps Capacitive
per phase load per phase load
(230 V, 50 Hz) in µF (230 V, 50 Hz) in µF
In for contactors: In for contactors:
Watt A B6, B7, BC6 and BC7 Watt A B6, B7, BC6 and BC7
Lamps with 1 x 18 – 17 20 40
electronic 2 x 18 – 8 50 20
ignition 1 x 36 – 11 75 13
device 2 x 36 – 6 100 10
1 x 56 – 11 150 7
2 x 58 – 6 200 5
300 3
EL
Abbreviations SEV DEMKO NEMKO SEMKO Inspect. CSA GL
Approvals Switzerland Denmark Norway Sweden Finland Canada USA Germany
Mini Contactors ➀
B6../ B7.. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ – ■ ■
B6/B7..-F ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
B6/B7..-P ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
BC6/BC 7.. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ – ■ ■
BC6/BC 7..-F ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
BC6/BC7..-P ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
BC6/BC7..-1.4 ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ – ■ ■
BC6/BC7..-F-1.4 ■ ■ – ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
BC6/BC7..-P-1.4 ■ ■ – ■ ■ ■ ■ – ■
BC6/BC7..-2.4 ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ – ■ ■
91 A 043
BC6/BC7..-F-2.4 ■ ■ – ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
BC6/BC7..-P-2.4 ■ ■ – ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
B 6-30-10 B 6 S/B7 S – – – – – ■ – ■ ■
Accessories
KC 6 - 31 Z CA6-11.. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ –
CA F6 – – – – – – – ■ –
LB6 – ■ – – ■ – ■ – –
LB6 -CA – – – – – – – – –
■ Certified standard version; the device label must bear the approval mark, if it is mandatory.
■ Being certified, ask on delivery.
➀ For B7 mini contactors, besides NEMKO, all approvals have been acquired.
Motor power values (Motor-rating) and rated current values (Amp-rating) in The values approved for contactors and contactor relays are given below.
compliance with CSA and UL for B(C) 6 and B(C) 7 contactors and K(C) 6 The reference values are given on the device and listed in the table below.
contactor relays.
CSA and UL approvals for contactors concern both the motor-rating and the amp-
rating that is generally used.
1-phase motor P (hp) 1/3 3/4 – – 1-phase motor P (hp) 1/2 1.5 2 2
Ie (A) 7.2 6.9 – – Ie (A) 9.8 10 6 4.8
Amp-rating: – 12 A-300 V, a.c. for B(C) 6 contactor main contacts Amp-rating: – 12 A-600 V, a.c. for B(C) 7 contactor main contacts
Pilot duty: A600 – 5 A-600 V a.c. for auxiliary contacts built into B(C)6, K(C)6 and B(C)7 contactors as well as for CA6 auxiliary contact blocks.
Values for 200 - 208V = (220 - 240V) x 1.15
Mini Contactors
Mini Contactor Relays
A 364 D
2 4 6 8 A2 2 4 6 14 A2 2 4 6 22 A2
Mini Contactors B 6(7)-40-00 - B 6(7)-30-10 - B 6(7)-30-01 -
BC 6(7)-40-00 - BC 6(7)-30-10 - BC 6(7)-30-01 -
A1 13 1 3 5 1 3 5 13 A1 A1 21 1 3 5 1 3 5 21 A1
A 365 D
A2 14 2 4 6 2 4 6 14 A2 A2 22 2 4 6 2 4 6 22 A2
Compact Reversing Contactors VB 6(7)-30-10 - VB 6(7)-30-01 -
VBC 6(7)-30-10 - VBC 6(7)-30-01 -
13 23 33 43 A1 13 33 43 21 A1 13 43 21 31 A1
A 366 D
14 24 34 44 A2 14 34 44 22 A2 14 44 22 32 A2
Mini Contactor Relays K 6-40 E - K 6-31 Z - K 6-22 Z -
KC 6-40 E - KC 6-31 Z - KC 6-22 Z -
A 368 D
22 22
14 22
CA 6-11E-P 14 2 4 6 8 B(C) 6(7)-40-00-P 14 2 4 6 8 14 24 12 22
3 = CAF 6-02E
33 1 3 5 13 33 1 3 5 13
33 21 23 33
CA 6-11M 21 B(C) 6(7)-30-10 B(C) 6-30-10
21 21 31
1 = CAF 6-11M
CA 6-11M-F ➟ B(C) 6(7)-30-10-F B(C) 7-30-10 ➟ CAF 6 2 = CAF 6-20M
A 369 D
A 369 D
22 22 34 22
CA 6-11M-P 34 2 4 6 14 B(C) 6(7)-30-10-P 34 2 4 6 14
24 34 22 32
3 = CAF 6-02M
13 1 3 5 21 13 1 3 5 21
31 13 31 13 33
CA 6-11N 31 B(C) 6(7)-30-01 B(C) 6-30-01 11 31
1 = CAF 6-11N
CA 6-11N-F ➟ B(C) 6(7)-30-01-F B(C) 7-30-01 ➟ CAF 6 2 = CAF 6-20N
A 370 D
A 370 D
32 32 14 32 14 34
CA 6-11N-P 14 2 4 6 22 B(C) 6(7)-30-01-P 14 2 4 6 22 12 32
3 = CAF 6-02N
SST 239...250 93 S
53 40 E 53 40 E
53 61 53 63
CA 6-11K 61 K(C) 6 ..... K(C) 6 .....61 51 61
1 = CAF 6-11K
CA 6-11K-F ➟ 31 Z
K(C) 6 ..... F ➟ 31 Z
2 = CAF 6-20K
A 371 D
A 371 D
62 62 54 62
CA 6-11K-P 54 22 Z K(C) 6 ..... P 54 22 Z 54 64 52 62
3 = CAF 6-02K
1 2 3
BBC 87 6101
BBC 87 6100
46.5
68 43.5
4 57.5
33.5
25.4
42
BBC 87 6102
BBC 87 6103
4.5
6
BBC 87 6104-1
BBC 87 6104-2
BBC 87 6642-2
BBC 87 6642-1
VB 6(7), VBC 6(7) Compact reversing contactor VB 6(7), VBC 6(7) Compact reversing contactor
screw connection flat pin connection
Drilling diagrams
BBC 87 6644
BBC 87 6107
BBC 87 6108
BBC 87 6106
B 6(7)-, BC 6(7)-, VB 6(7), VBC 6(7) Standard Standard device Compact reversing
K 6-, KC 6- VB 6A(7A), VBC 6A(7A) 4-pole with auxiliary contactor
device contact block
4 50
35 ... 45
47,5
9,1 9,1 9,1 9,1 46,5
¯4,5 4,5
25,4
50
BBC 87 6645
42
105
47
B 6 (7) - F with LB 6
SST20398
32 4 6,5
5 45 56
B 6(7) with T 7 DU
BBC 87 6646
CA 6, screw connection
4.0 min.
4
BBC 87 6649
BBC 87 6647
BBC 87 6648
ON/OFF indicator
SST 210 94 M
SST 211 94 M
35 mm
EN 50022
B(C) 6, B(C) 7, K(C) 6 with CAF 6 front-mounted auxiliary contact block CAF 6, screw connection
Ordering details
Type Order Code Setting Range Max. fuse Packing Weight
aM gG(gl)
A ... A A A piece kg
Tripping curves
120
100
80
60
40
20
from cold state
10
SST 001 98
8
6
4
Minutes
T 7 DU + B 7-30-01
Tripping time
1
40
3 phase
6
20
Seconds
2 phase
10
8
6
4
2
SST20198G
1
0.8 1 1.2 1.5 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Tripping current
in multiples of the setting current
3
SST 206 98
Setting 2
2 Reset
Position A: automatic reset Neutral
push
Position H: manual reset position
pull
3 Test: Neutral position : Running free
Push position : Stop action
NO 97 NC 95
i.e. N.C. contact (95-96) operated
A310
NO 98 NC 96
i.e. both N.O. and N.C. contacts operated
Technical Data
Type T 7 DU
Standards (international, european) IEC 947-4-1, EN 60 947-4-1
Approvals and certifications UL, CSA, PTB
Rated insulation voltage Ui V 690
according to IEC 947-4-1
Rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp kV 6
according to IEC 947-4-1
Air temperature close to thermal O/L relay
– for storage °C –40 to +70
– during operation (temperature compensation) °C –25 to +50 (open-air)
Climatic withstand according to IEC 68-2-3, IEC 68-2-30 -
Mounting position ± 30° from standard vertical mounting position
not horizontally, not upside down
(5 mm side by side mounting distance)
Shock withstand A2
shock duration ms 10
Critical direction
91 A 373
A1
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
■ Approved through normal procedure, the company labels
bear the certification mark when it is mandatory.
■ Being approved, availability date on request.
6
Notes
Contents
Definitions
ABB low voltage devices are developed and manufactured according to the rules set out in IEC international publications, in EN European
specifications and in national standards such as UTE, VDE and BS.
In most countries, low voltage apparatus is built according to such rules with checking being the responsibility of the manufacturer. The devices
are therefore not subject to any further obligation for approval. However, for devices designed for domestic use or for the general public, a test report
from our laboratories can be remitted to our customers, on request, for presentation to different qualified local organizations.
In other countries, certifications are required by law.
For devices installed on board ships, maritime insurance companies require the devices to be approved by independent certification organisations
such as BV, GL and LRS.
Certification and approval requirements are described on pages 7/4 and 7/5.
Specifications
● International Specifications
The International Electrotechnical Commission, IEC, which is part of the International Standards Organization, ISO, publishes IEC publications
which act as a basis for the world market.
● European Directives
The guarantee of the free movement of goods within the European Community means that any regulatory differences between member states have
been eliminated. The European directives set up common rules that are included in the legislation of each state while contradictory regulations are
cancelled.
Three directives are essential:
– Low Voltage Directive 73/23/EEC concerns electrical equipment from 50 to 1000 V a.c. and from 75 to 1500 V d.c.
This specifies that compliance with the requirements that it sets out is acquired once the equipment conforms with the standards harmonized on
a European level: EN 60 947-1 and EN 60 947-4-1 for contactors.
– Machines Directive 89/392/EEC for safety specifications of machines and equipment on complete machines. Machines bearing the CE mark
comply with these specifications.
– Electromagnetic Compatibility Directive 89/336/EEC which concerns all devices able to create electromagnetic disturbance. Amendment A11
to standard EN 60 947-4-1 does not set out any requirement concerning the level of emission or immunity of contactors which do not have any
active electronic components. Owing to this fact, compliance with standard EN 60 947-4-1 meets the requirements for CE marking, with respect
to this directive.
CE Marking:
CE marking must not be confused with a quality label.
CE marking is proof of conformity with the European Directives concerning the product.
CE marking is part of a procedure for exclusively administrative use and is intended to guarantee the free movement of the product within the
European Community.
Specifications (cont.)
●International Standards
IEC 947-1 Low-voltage switchgear and controlgear – Part 1: General rules (NFC 63-001).
IEC 947-4-1 Low-voltage switchgear and controlgear – Part 4: Contactors and motor starters – Section 1: Electromechanical contactors
and motor starters (NFC 63-001).
IEC 947- 5-1 Low-voltage switchgear and controlgear – Part 5: Control circuit devices and switching elements –
Section 1: Electromechanical control circuit devices (NFC 63-146).
IEC 947- 6-1 Low-voltage switchgear and controlgear – Part 6: Multiple function equipment – Section 1: Automatic transfer switching
equipment (NFC 63-160).
IEC 204-1 Electrical equipment of industrial machines – Part 1: General requirements (≈ NFC 79-130).
IEC 204-2 Electrical equipment of industrial machines – Part 2: Item designation and examples of drawings, diagrams, tables
and instructions (Appendices D and E of Publication 204-1).
●European Standards
EN 50 001 Low-voltage switchgear and controlgear for industrial use - Dimensions: General requirements (NFC 63-090).
EN 50 002 Low-voltage switchgear and controlgear for industrial use - Dimensions: Fixing holes of contactor relays (NFC 63-091).
EN 50 003 Low-voltage switchgear and controlgear for industrial use - Dimensions - Motor contactor fixing holes (NFC 63-092).
EN 50 005 Low-voltage switchgear and controlgear for industrial use - Terminal marking and distinctive number: General rules
(NFC 63-030).
EN 50 011 Low-voltage switchgear and controlgear for industrial use - Terminal marking, distinctive number and distinctive letter for
particular contactor relays (NFC 63-031).
EN 50 012 Low-voltage switchgear and controlgear for industrial use - Terminal marking and distinctive number for auxiliary contacts of
particular contactors (NFC 63-032).
EN 50 022 Low-voltage switchgear and controlgear for industrial use - Mounting rails - Top hat rails 35 mm wide for snap-on mounting
of equipment (NFC 63-015).
EN 50 023 Low-voltage switchgear and controlgear for industrial use - Mounting rails - Top hat rails 75 mm wide for snap-on mounting
of equipment (NFC 63-016).
EN 60 947-1 Low-voltage switchgear and controlgear – Part 1: General rules (NFC 63-001) + amendment A11.
EN 60 947-4-1 Low-voltage switchgear and controlgear – Part 4: Contactors and motor starters - Section 1: Electromechanical contactors
and motor starters (NFC 63-110).
EN 60 947-5-1 Low-voltage switchgear and controlgear – Part 5: Control circuit devices and switching elements - Section 1: Electrome-
chanical control circuit devices (NFC 63-146).
● National Standards
– Germany: DIN VDE 0660
Part 100 Low-voltage switchgear and controlgear – General rules (EN 60 947-1).
Part 100/A11 Amendment A11.
Part 102 Electromechanical contactors and motor starters (EN 60 947-4-1).
Part 200 Control circuit devices and switching elements; Electromechanical control circuit devices (EN 60 947-5-1).
– France
UTE NFC 63-001 Low-voltage switchgear and controlgear – Part 1: General rules + Amendment 11 (EN 60 947-1 + A11).
UTE NFC 63-110 Low-voltage switchgear and controlgear – Part 4: Contactors and motor starters - Section 1: Electromechanical contactors
and motor starters (EN 60 947-4-1).
UTE NFC 63-140 Control switches (Low voltage switching devices for control and auxiliary circuits, including contactor relays)
– Part 1 - Section 1: General requirements.
UTE NFC 63-146 Low-voltage switchgear and controlgear – Part 5: Control circuit devices and switching elements -
Section 1: Electromechanical control circuit devices (EN 60 947-5-1).
– Switzerland: SEV Publication
N° 1025
TP 17 B/2A -d
Safety regulations for contactors.
Requirements and condition of testing for motor protection or overload protection switch.
7
TP 17 B/4A -d Requirements and condition of testing for motor protection or overload protection switch.
– Great Britain
BS 5424 (Part 1) Specifications for controlgear for voltages up to and including 1000 V a.c. and 1200 V d.c.
BS 4794 Control switches (switching devices including contactor relays for control and auxiliary circuits) up to and including 1000 V
a.c. and 1200 V d.c. (similar to IEC 337 Publication).
BS 4941 Motor starter for voltages up to and including 1000 V a.c. and 1200 V d.c. (similar to IEC 292 Publication).
– Sweden
SS 428 0600 Switching devices for max. 1KV. Survey of standards - International standards - Validity of Swedish standard.
Designed according to the appropriate specifications, the devices in this catalogue have been built and tested by ourselves. They can be used in most countries without any further certifications being
necessary.
Some countries, however, require certification according to their own national standards. In other cases, the Marine for example, approvals ratifying that particular specifications have been met are
necessary.
The table below shows the state of approvals and certifications for different devices.
The following documents may be obtained on request: - certificates of conformity.
- certificates of certification or approval.
The use of certified devices does not exonerate the equipment supplier from complying with the legal specifications of the country concerned.
Explanation of symbols:
■ Standard design approved, the company labels bear the certification mark when this is required. ● No approval required, except in specific cases.
▲ Draft approval in progress. ▲ Approved with restrictions.
Mark
Designed according to the appropriate specifications, the devices in this catalogue have been built and tested by ourselves. They can be used in most countries without any further certifications being
necessary.
Some countries, however, require certification according to their own national standards. In other cases, the Marine for example, approvals ratifying that particular specifications have been met are
necessary.
The table below shows the state of approvals and certifications for different devices.
The following documents may be obtained on request: - certificates of conformity.
- certificates of certification or approval.
The use of certified devices does not exonerate the equipment supplier from complying with the legal specifications of the country concerned.
Explanation of symbols:
■ Standard design approved, the company labels bear the certification mark when this is required. ● No approval required, except in specific cases.
▲ Draft approval in progress. ▲ Approved with restrictions.
Mark
Contactor Relays
4-pole KC - ■ ■ – ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ● ▲
8-pole KC - ■ ■ – ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ● ▲
4-pole N - ■ ■ – ■ ■ ■ ■ ▲ ▲ ▲
8-pole N - ■ ■ – ■ ■ ■ ■ ▲ ▲ ▲
3-phase motor-rating
A 998
Ie A 25.3 28 27 27
A 30 1P P hp 10 10 25 30
Ie A 32.2 28 34 32
A 40 – P hp 10 15 30 40
Ie A 32.2 42 40 41
A 45, A 50 2 P hp 15 20 40 50
Ie A 48.3 54 52 52
A 63 – P hp 20 25 60 75
Ie A 62.1 68 77 77
A 75 3 P hp 25 30 60 75
Ie A 78.2 80 77 77
A 95 – P hp 30 30 60 75
Ie A 92 80 77 77
A 110 – P hp 30 40 75 100
Ie A 92 104 96 99
EH 145 4 P hp 40 50 100 125
Ie A 119.6 130 124 125
EH 175 4 P hp 50 60 125 150
Ie A 149.5 145 156 144
EH 210 – P hp 60 75 150 200
Ie A 166.7 192 180 192
EH 260 5 P hp 75 100 200 250
Ie A 220.8 248 240 242
EH 300 5 P hp 100 100 250 250
Ie A 285 248 302 242
EH 370 – P hp 125 150 350 400
Ie A 358 360 414 382
EH 550 6 P hp 150 200 400 500
Ie A 414 480 477 472
EH 700 – P hp 200 250 500 600
Ie A 552 602 590 –
EH 800 7 P hp 250 300 600 700
Ie A 692 – – –
Note: Other specific versions for the North-American market can be delivered on request.
Altitude
Characterizes the place of use. It is expressed in metres above sea level.
Circuits
– auxiliary circuit:
All the conductive parts of a contactor designed to be inserted in a different circuit from the main circuit and the contactor control circuits.
– control circuit:
All the conductive parts of a contactor (other than the main circuit and the auxiliary circuit) used to control the contactor's closing operation or opening
operation or both.
– main circuit:
All the conductive parts of a contactor designed to be inserted in the circuit that it controls.
Cycle Time
This is the sum of the current flow time and the no-current time for given cycle.
Electrical Durability
Number of on-load operations that the contactor is able to carry out. It depends on the utilization category.
Mechanical Durability
Number of no-current operations that a contactor is able to carry out.
Load Factor
Ratio of the on-load operating time to the total cycle time x 100.
Switching Frequency
Number of switching cycles per hour.
Plugging
Stopping or fast reversal in rotation direction of a motor by two supply leads being interchanged while the motor is running.
Inching
Energization of a motor's circuit repeatedly or for short periods with the aim of obtaining small movements of the driven mechanism.
Mounting Position
Comply with the manufacturer's instructions. Restrictions are to be taken into account for certain mounting positions.
Intermittent Duty
Duty during which the contactor is successively closed or open for periods which are too short to enable the contactor to achieve thermal balance.
Ambient Temperature
Air temperature close to the contactor.
Time
– Time constant:
Ratio of the inductance to the resistance (L/R = mH/Ω = ms).
– Short-time withstand current:
Current that the contactor is able to withstand in closed position for a short time interval and in specified conditions.
– Minimum switching time:
This is the minimum closing or opening order time necessary for the contactor to reach complete closing or opening.
– Closing time:
Time interval between the beginning of the closing operation and the instant the contacts touch on all the poles.
– Opening time:
Time interval between the specified starting instant of the opening operation and the instant the arcing contacts separate on all the poles.
Shock Withstand 7
Requirement for vehicles, crane drives, installations on board ships and plug-in equipment. For the acceptable "g" values, the contactors must not
change position and the thermal O/L relays must not trip.
Resistance to Vibrations
Requirements for vehicles, boats and other means of transport. For the specified vibration amplitude and frequency values the device must remain
able to operate.
Standards:
IEC publications 941-1, 947-4-1 and 947-5-1 should be referred to on an international level with respect to contactors, contactor relays and thermal
O/L relays.
Utilization Categories:
A contactor's duty is characterised by the utilization category together with the rated operational voltage and current indicated.
Direct current: DC-1 Non inductive or slightly inductive loads, resistance furnaces.
DC-3 Shunt motors: starting, plugging, inching, dynamic breaking of d.c. motors.
DC-5 Series motors: starting, plugging, inching, dynamic breaking of d.c. motors.
DC-6 Incandescent lamp switching.
Direct current: DC-12 Control of resistive loads and static loads with opto-coupler isolation.
DC-13 Control of d.c. electromagnets.
DC-14 Control of d.c. electromagnets having economy resistors.
In fact some applications, and the specific criteria characterizing the various loads controlled by contactors, may modify the utilization characteristics
of the contactors. The main applications concerned are:
Capacitor Bank Switching
Account must be taken of high peaks when the current is made and of harmonic currents during continuous duty. For this application, IEC publication
947-4-1 stipulates utilization category AC-6b. The operational currents or powers acceptable for the contactors are determined by our electrical tests;
IEC publication 947-4-1 gives the calculating formula for determining the operational current (Table VII b).
Transformer Switching
Account must be taken of the peaks due to magnetization phenomena when the current is made.
For this application, IEC publication 947-4-1 stipulates utilization category AC-6a. The operational currents or powers acceptable for the contactors
are determined using the values obtained for AC-3 or AC-4 category tests and the calculating formula given in IEC 947-4-1 (Table VII b).
Lighting Circuit Switching
The current peaks occurring on energization of the circuit and the power factor depend on the type of lamps, the connection mode and whether or
not there is compensation.
For this application, IEC publication 947-4-1 stipulates two standard utilization categories:
– AC-5a for discharge lamp switching.
– AC-5b for incandescent lamp switching.
Slip-ring Motor Switching
The contactors used for short-circuiting rotor resistors can be used for rotor voltages above their natural nominal operational voltage.
The conditions of use of rotor contactors depend on the connection mode of the main poles.
The current values on circuit closing and the current and voltage values on circuit opening (as well as a generally low load factor) are easily withstood
by the contactors.
Key:
U (I) = applied voltage (current) Ic = making and breaking current expressed in d.c. or in a.c. like the
Ur = recovery voltage r.m.s. value of the symmetrical components
L/R = test circuit time constant T0.95 = time required to reach 95% of the current in steady-state conditions,
Ue (Ie) = rated operational voltage (current) expressed in milliseconds
General
In an installation, the degree of protection required for electrical equipment depends on the environmental characteristics. The degree of protection,
ensured by the enclosure of equipment or by the cubicle containing the equipment is expressed by the IP code which gives the level of protection
against access to hazardous parts, the ingress of foreign bodies and/or the ingress of water, in compliance with IEC 529, EN 60529, IEC 947-1 and
EN 60947-1. Besides the IP symbol, the complete code has two figures followed (optionally) by two additional letters. A short description of the
elements used in IP coding is given below.
Codes IP
0 No protection No protection
1 Diameter > 50 mm Back of hand
2 Diameter > 12.5 mm Finger
3 Diameter > 2.5 mm Tool
4 Diameter > 1 mm Wire
5 Limited protection against dust Wire
6 Total protection against dust Wire
0 No protection –
1 Vertical dripping
2 Dripping at a vertical angle of < 15°
3 Rain at a vertical angle of < 60°
4 Splashing
5 Low pressure water jet
6 Powerful water jets
7 Temporary immersion
8 Permanent immersion
Note: The type of enclosure or cubicle in which the equipment must be installed prevails with respect to the degree of protection.
The life time and dependability of devices are mainly influenced by a series of climatic factors which cause their
corrosion.
In practice, besides climatic conditions, there are other factors which may damage equipment such as fungi,
insects (termites), dust, work site dirt and aggressive environment (salty or sulphurous atmosphere, etc.) which
can often only be identified at the place of installation.
Climatic stress, definitions and test conditions are dealt with in national publications such as the DIN 50 series
and NFC 20 series which are attached to international publications such as IEC 68.
ABB devices meet the requirements of UTE publication 63-100 (specification II): humid heat tests in successive
cycles at different temperatures and at a relative humidity of 95%.
ABB contactors have been used for many years in the most varied countries, with hot and humid climates for
example: Brazil, Indonesia, India or on ships. Experience has shown that ABB devices can be used in most
countries throughout the world.
The climate of the country in which the apparatus is installed is not the determining choice factor.
Account must be taken of:
– the immediate environment of the devices (sheltered, ventilated, temperature),
– the aggressivity of the immediate atmosphere at the place of installation,
– the length and frequency of non operating periods.
In the case of frequent condensation (i.e. the formation of steam caused by rapid changes in temperature),
heating resistors must be installed in cubicles (100 to 250 W per m3 of enclosure).
The table below gives the cases where heating is necessary.
The entrance of dust, insects, dirt, etc. in devices may be prevented if the appropriate degree of protection
according to IEC 529 is chosen (See "Degree of protection" table).
E0523D
E0522D
M l e ø
E0520D
E0521D
E0524D
h
l
E0525D
E0523D
E0522D
M l e ø
E0524D
Width - Ø
hxl exl-Ø mm2 mm2 mm
Thermal O/L relays
● Poles:
- TA 25 DU ≤ 25 M4 — — 2 x 1.5 - 6 2 x 1.5 - 4 —
- TA 25 DU 32 — 4.5 x 5.5 — 1 x 10 2 x 0.75 - 6 —
- TA 42, TA 75, TA 80 — 9 x 10 — 1 x 2.5 - 35 or 2 x 2.5 - 16 1 x 2.5 - 25 or 2 x 2.5 - 10 —
- TA 110 — 14 x 14 — 16 - 35 16 - 35 —
- T 200 — — 4 x 20 - Ø11 25 - 120 25 - 95 30 - Ø11
- T 450 + AT 450 — — 5 x 30 - Ø11 2 x 240 2 x 240 30 - Ø11
- T 900 + AT 900 — — 5 - 8 x 50 - Ø11 2 x 300 2 x 300 50 - Ø11
● Auxiliary contact terminals:
- TA 25 - 110, T 200 - 900 M 3.5 — — 2 x 0.75 - 4 2 x 0.75 - 2.5 —
B A A' C B A D C
E0509D
E0510D
Type of Main poles Built-in aux. poles Coil terminals Housing assembly Cover fixing Contact screws
contactors A A' B C D
Tightening torque: Tightening torque: Tightening torque: Tightening torque: Tightening torque:
recommended max. recommended max. recommended max. recommended max. recommended
Ncm/lb.in Ncm Ncm/lb.in Ncm Ncm/lb.in Ncm Ncm/lb.in Ncm Ncm/lb.in
A(E) 95/110 600/53 650 100/9 120 135/12 150 100/9 120 500/45
M 10 M 3.5 ± poz.2
TP Tightening torque:
LK 75-A, LK 75-A1 recommended max.
VE 5-1, VE 5-2 Ncm Ncm
WB 75 (± poz.1 screw) 100 120
In compliance with standards IEC 947-4-1 and EN 60 947-4-1, we define for the contactors and starters the type, rating and characteristics of the
short-circuit protection devices SCPD which allow selective protection against overloads and ensure protection against short circuits.
Basic Functions
In order to protect the connecting cable and the motor, the switchgear must ensure the four following essential functions:
– Protection against overloads - This protection concerns the motor and the cable and is ensured by the starter overload relay.
– Motor control - This function is commonly carried out by the contactor.
– Protection against short-circuits.
– Isolation.
The latter two functions can be carried out by a circuit-breaker or by a switch-disconnector-fuse protecting the motor and the cable against short
circuits and ensuring isolation with positive contact indication.
Applicable Standards
IEC 947-4-1 (EN 60 947-4-1) precisely defines the different points to be considered in order to carry out correct co-ordination.
Complete co-ordination for a combination includes the following points:
– Selectivity test between the overload relay and the short-circuit protection device SCPD.
– Short-circuit condition tests:
● at prospective "r" currents - These currents depend on the rated operational current of the starter (Ie AC-3) and are given by the standard
(Table XI). For example: r = 1kA for Ie AC-3 < 16 A; r = 3 kA for 16 A < Ie AC-3 < 63 A ; r = 5 kA for 63 A < Ie AC-3 < 125 A etc.
● at the rated short-circuit current "Iq" - This is the maximum current that the combination can withstand, for example 50 kA.
Types of Co-ordination
IEC 947-4-1 (EN 60 947-4-1) defines two types of co-ordination according to the expected level of service continuity. Acceptable extreme damage
for the switchgear is divided into two types.
Type 1: In short-circuit conditions, the contactor or starter does not endanger persons or installations and will not be able to then operate without
being repaired or having parts replaced.
Type 2: In short-circuit conditions, the contactor or starter does not endanger persons or installations and will be able to operate afterwards. The
risk of contacts welding is acceptable.
Direct-on-line Starters
Co-ordination according to IEC 947-4-1
Direct-on-line Starters
Co-ordination according to IEC 947-4-1
Direct-on-line Starters
Co-ordination according to IEC 947-4-1
Direct-on-line Starters
Co-ordination according to IEC 947-4-1
Notes
Terminal Marking
and Positioning
Star-Delta Starter Diagrams
Contents
1-Standards
Terminal marking of contactors, contactor relays, auxiliary contacts and thermal O/L relays generally complies with international and European
standards IEC 445, IEC 947-1 and EN50005. In addition, the marking of these devices also meets the following specific standards:
– IEC 947-4-1, EN60947-4-1 and EN50012 for contactors and contactor auxiliary contacts,
– IEC 947-5-1 and EN50011 for contactor relays,
– IEC 947-4-1 and EN60047-4-1 for thermal O/L relays.
2-Contactor Marking
2.1-Marking of contactor main pole terminals
Main pole terminals are marked by codes made up of a figure followed by an alphanumerical combination: e.g. 1L-2T1, 3L2-4T2, etc.
2.2-Marking of contactor auxiliary contact terminals
Contactor auxiliary contacts are marked by two-figure numbers:
● The unit figure marks the function:
– 1-2 for N.C. contacts, – 5-6 for N.C. contacts with a special function,
– 3-4 for N.O. contacts, – 7-8 for N.O. contacts with a special function.
The tens figure is a serial number allocated in continuous order starting from 1, regardless of the function of the contacts and running from left
●
to right on the device starting with the 1st stack for 2-stack devices.
Furthermore, to meet the requirements of the American market these numbers are followed by the letters NO for normally open contacts and
NC for normally closed contacts.
2.3-Identification of contacts in contactor codes
Example : A9 3 0 - 1 0
Contactor
Number of main N.O. poles Number of N.C. auxiliary contacts
Number of main N.C. poles Number of N.O. auxiliary contacts
Depending on device ratings, we deliver the following auxiliary contact arrangements (defined in standard EN50012): 00, 10, 01, 11, 22.
Other arrangements are possible by adding additional auxiliary contacts: 11, 12, 13, 21, 22, 23, 31, 32, 41.
21 2- -1
NC = + NC
22 2- -2
NO NO
E0648D
NC NO
E0046D1
E0041D1
-2 -4
CA5-01 CA5-10
-5 -7
NC NO
E0403D1
E0404D1
-6 -8
CC5-01 CC5-10
NO NC NC NO
E0467DG
E0468DG
13 21 31 43 53 61 71 83
NO NC NC NO NO NC NC NO
E0472D
E0469D
E0471D
E0470D
14 22 32 44 54 62 72 84
35 47
NC NO
E0473D
36 48
CCL16-11 E
NC NC NC NC NC NC NC NC NC NC NC NC
E0396D1
E0399D1
E0402D1
12 22 32 42 22 32 42 52 52 62 72 82
13 21 31 43 21 31 43 53 53 61 71 83
NO NC NC NO NC NC NO NO NO NC NC NO
E0043D1
E0398D1
E0401D1
14 22 32 44 22 32 44 54 54 62 72 84
13 21 33 43 21 33 43 53
NO NC NO NO NC NO NO NO
E0395D1
E0397D1
14 22 34 44 22 34 44 54
CA5-31 E
13 23 33 43
CA5-31 M
53 63 73 83
8
NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO
E0042D1
E0400D1
14 24 34 44 54 64 74 84
CA5-40 E CA5-40 N
13 21 35 47 21 33 45 57
NO NC NC NO NC NO NC NO
E0993D1
E0992D1
14 22 36 48 22 34 46 58
CA5-11/11 E CA5-11/11 M
E0308D1
E0037D1
13 21 31 43 13 21 33 43 13 23 33 43 13 23 33 43
NO NC NC NO NO NC NO NO
NO NC NC NO NO NC NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO A2 14 22 32 44 A2 14 22 34 44
51 61 71 81
N 22 E N 31 E
NC NC NC NC
A1 13 23 33 43 A1 13 23 33 43 51 61 71 81
52 62 72 82 NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NC NC NC NC
NO NC NC NO NO NC NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO
E0334D1
E0332D1
E0333D1
E0309D1
E0329D1
E0335D1
14 22 32 44 14 22 34 44 14 24 34 44 14 24 34 44
A2 A2 A2 A2 NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NC NC NC NC
A2 14 24 34 44 A2 14 24 34 44 52 62 72 82
N 22 E N 31 E N 40 E N 44 E N 40 E N 44 E
A1 13 23 33 43 53 61 71 81 A1 13 23 33 43 53 61 71 83
NO NO NO NO NO NC NC NC NO NO NO NO NO NC NC NO
A1 A2 A1 A2 A1 A2 A1 A2
E0328D1
E0327D1
13 23 33 43 13 23 33 43 13 23 33 43 13 23 33 43
NO NO NO NO NO NC NC NC NO NO NO NO NO NC NC NO
NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO A2 14 24 34 44 54 62 72 82 A2 14 24 34 44 54 62 72 84
53 61 71 81 53 61 71 83 53 61 73 83 53 63 73 83
N 53 E N 62 E
NO NC NC NC NO NC NC NO NO NC NO NO NO NO NO NO
A1 13 23 33 43 53 61 73 83 A1 13 23 33 43 53 63 73 83
54 62 72 82 54 62 72 84 54 62 74 84 54 64 74 84 NO NO NO NO NO NC NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO
NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO
E0336D1
E0337D1
E0338D1
E0339D1
E0326D1
E0330D1
14 24 34 44 14 24 34 44 14 24 34 44 14 24 34 44
A2 A2 A2 A2 NO NO NO NO NO NC NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO
A2 14 24 34 44 54 62 74 84 A2 14 24 34 44 54 64 74 84
N 53 E N 62 E N 71 E N 80 E N 71 E N 80 E
A1 A2 A1 A2
13 23 33 41 13 23 33 43
NO NO NO NC NO NO NO NO
51 61 75 87 53 61 75 87
NC NC NC NO NO NC NC NO
A1 13 23 33 41 51 61 75 87 A1 13 23 33 43 53 61 75 87
52 62 76 88 54 62 76 88 NO NO NO NC NC NC NC NO NO NO NO NO NO NC NC NO
NO NO NO NC NO NO NO NO
E0991D
E0990D
E0989D
E0988D
14 24 34 42 14 24 34 44
A2 A2 NO NO NO NC NC NC NC NO NO NO NO NO NO NC NC NO
A2 14 24 34 42 52 62 76 88 A2 14 24 34 44 54 62 76 88
2.1.2 - Other possible contact combinations with auxiliary contacts added by the user
A1 13 21 33 43 53
NO NC NO NO NO
A1 A2 A1 A2 A1 A2 A1 A2
E0475DG
13 21 33 43 13 21 33 43 13 23 33 43 13 23 33 43
NO NC NO NO NO NC NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NC NO NO NO
A2 14 22 34 44 54
53 5- -3 51 61 5- 6- -1 -1 Combination 41 E
NO = + NO NC NC = + NC + NC
54 5- -4 52 62 5- 6- -2 -2
A1 13 23 33 43 51 61
NO NO NO NO NC NC
NO NC NO NO NO NC NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO
E0477DG
E0474DG
E0476DG
14 22 34 44 14 22 34 44 14 24 34 44 14 24 34 44
A2 A2 A2 A2 NO NO NO NO NC NC
A2 14 24 34 44 52 62
A1 13 23 33 43 53
NO NO NO NO NO
E0480DG
A1 A2 A1 A2 A1 A2 A1 A2
13 23 33 43 13 23 33 43 13 23 33 43 13 23 33 43
NO NO NO NO NO
NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO A2 14 24 34 44 54
Combination 50 E
53 5- -3 53 63 5- 6- -3 -3
NO = + NO NO NO = + NO + NO
54 5- -4 54 64 5- 6- -4 -4
A1 13 23 33 43 53 63
NO NO NO NO NO NO
NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO
E0478DG
E0481DG
E0479DG
14 24 34 44 14 24 34 44 14 24 34 44 14 24 34 44
A2 A2 A2 A2 NO NO NO NO NO NO
A2 14 24 34 44 54 64
A1 A1 A1
13 21 31 43 13 21 33 43 13 23 33 43
NO NC NC NO NO NC NO NO NO NO NO NO
A1 13 21 31 43 A1 13 21 33 43 A1 13 23 33 43
NO NC NC NO NO NC NO NO NO NO NO NO
NO NC NC NO NO NC NO NO NO NO NO NO
E0482D
E0483D
E0484D
E0487D
E0488D
E0489D
14 22 32 44 14 22 34 44 14 24 34 44
A2 A2 A2 NO NC NC NO NO NC NO NO NO NO NO NO
A2 14 22 32 44 A2 14 22 34 44 A2 14 24 34 44
KC 22 E KC 31 E KC 40 E KC 22 E KC 31 E KC 40 E
TKC 22 E TKC 31 E TKC 40 E TKC 22 E TKC 31 E TKC 40 E
A1 A1
13 23 33 43 13 23 33 43
NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO
51 61 71 81 53 61 71 83
NC NC NC NC NO NC NC NO
A1 13 23 33 43 51 61 71 81 A1 13 23 33 43 53 61 71 83
52 62 72 82 54 62 72 84 NO NO NO NO NC NC NC NC NO NO NO NO NO NC NC NO
NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO
E0485D
E0486D
E0491D
E0490D
14 24 34 44 14 24 34 44
A2 A2 NO NO NO NO NC NC NC NC NO NO NO NO NO NC NC NO
A2 14 24 34 44 52 62 72 82 A2 14 24 34 44 54 62 72 84
KC 44 E KC 62 E KC 44 E KC 62 E
TKC 44 E TKC 62 E TKC 44 E TKC 62 E
2.2.2 - Other possible contact combinations with auxiliary contacts added by the user
A1 13 21 33 43 53
NO NC NO NO NO
E0494DG
A1 A1 A1 A1
13 21 33 43 13 21 33 43 13 23 33 43 13 23 33 43 NO NC NO NO NC
A2 14 22 34 44 54
NO NC NO NO NO NC NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO
Combination 41 E
53 5- -3 51 61 5- 6- -1 -1
NO = + NO NC NC = + NC + NC
54 5- -4 52 62 5- 6- -2 -2
A1 13 23 33 43 51 61
NO NO NO NO NC NC
NO NC NO NO NO NC NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO
E0495DG
E0492DG
E0493DG
14 22 34 44 14 22 34 44 14 24 34 44 14 24 34 44
A2 A2 A2 A2 NO NO NO NO NC NC
A2 14 24 34 44 52 62
A1 13 23 33 43 53
NO NO NO NO NO E0498DG
A1 A1 A1 A1
13 23 33 43 13 23 33 43 13 23 33 43 13 23 33 43 NO NO NO NO NO
A2 14 24 34 44 54
NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO
Combination 50 E
53 5- -3 53 63 5- 6- -3 -3
NO = + NO NO NO = + NO + NO
54 5- -4 54 64 5- 6- -4 -4
A1 13 23 33 43 53 63
NO NO NO NO NO NO
NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO
E0496DG
E0499DG
E0497DG
14 24 34 44 14 24 34 44 14 24 34 44 14 24 34 44
8
A2 A2 A2 A2 NO NO NO NO NO NO
A2 14 24 34 44 54 64
A1 A1
13 23 33 43 13 23 33 43
NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO
53 63 73 83 5- 6- 7- 8- 53 63 73 83
NO NO NO NO = + NO NO NO NO
A1 13 23 33 43 53 63 73 83
54 64 74 84 5- 6- 7- 8- 54 64 74 84 NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO
NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO
E0500DG
E0601DG
14 24 34 44 14 24 34 44
A2 A2 NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO
A2 14 24 34 44 54 64 74 84
A1 A2 A1 A2 A1 A2
1L1 3L2 5L3 21 1L1 3L2 5L3 13 1L1 3L2 5L3
NC NO
E0009D2
E0011D1
E0341D1
E0305D1
E0340D1
E0306D1
2T1 4T2 6T3 22 2T1 4T2 6T3 14 2T1 4T2 6T3
A2 A2 A2 NC NO
A2 2T1 4T2 6T3 22 A2 2T1 4T2 6T3 14 A2 2T1 4T2 6T3
A9 ... A40-30-01 A9 ... A40-30-10 A50 ... A110-30-00 A9 ... A40-30-01 A9 ... A40-30-10 A50 ... A110-30-00
A1 A2 A1 A2
1 R3 R5 7 1L1 3L2 5L3 7L4
E0394D1
A0430D1
E0036D1
2 R4 R6 8 2T1 4T2 6T3 8T4
A2 A2
A2 2 R4 R6 8 A2 2T1 4T2 6T3 8T4
A1 A2 A1 A2
1L1 3L2 5L3 1L1 3L2 5L3
13 21 31 43
6- 13 21 31 43
5-
NO NC NC NO NO NC NC NO
E0010D1
NC 21X
NC NC NO NO
NC 22X
A1 1L1 3L2 5L3 13 21 31 43 53 A1 1L1 3L2 5L3 13X 21X
22 32 44 54 NO NC NC NO NO NO NC
NO NO 14X
E0342D1
E0012D1
E0008D2
E0324D1
A9 ... A40-30-32 A50 ... A110-30-11 A9 ... A40-30-32 A50 ... A110-30-11
3.1.3 - Other possible contact combinations with auxiliary contacts added by the user
A1 1L1 3L2 5L3 13 21
NO NC
A1 A2 A1 A2 A1 A2 A1 A2
E0622DG
1L1 3L2 5L3 13 1L1 3L2 5L3 13 1L1 3L2 5L3 13 1L1 3L2 5L3 13
NO NO NO NO NO NC
A2 2T1 4T2 6T3 14 22
21 2- -1 21 33 2- 3- -1 -3 Combination 11
NC = + NC NC NO = + NC + NO
22 2- -2 22 34 2- 3- -2 -4
A1 1L1 3L2 5L3 13 21 33
NO NC NO
NO NO NO NO
E0627DG
E0620DG
E0625DG
2T1 4T2 6T3 14 2T1 4T2 6T3 14 2T1 4T2 6T3 14 2T1 4T2 6T3 14
A2 A2 A2 A2 NO NC NO
A2 2T1 4T2 6T3 14 22 34
Combination = A9 ... A40-30-10 + CA5-01 Combination = A9 ... A40-30-10 + CA5-01 + CA5-10 Combination 21
11 21
A1 1L1 3L2 5L3 13X 21X 31X 43X
NO NC NC NO
A1 A2 A1 A2 A1 A2 A1 A2
E0623DG
1L1 3L2 5L3 1L1 3L2 5L3 1L1 3L2 5L3 7L4 1L1 3L2 5L3 7L4
NO NC NC NO
13X 43X NO 13X 43X NO A2 2T1 4T2 6T3 14X 22X 32X 44X
21X 31X NC 21X 31X NC
6- 13 2- 3- 4- 5- 6- 1- 2- 3- 4- 5- -3 Combination 22
= + NO = + NO
22X 32X NC 22X 32X NC 6- 14 2- 3- 4- 5- 6- 1- 2- 3- 4- 5- -4
A1 1L1 3L2 5L3 7L4 13
14X 44X NO 14X 44X NO NO
E0621DG
E0624DG
E0626DG
2T1 4T2 6T3 2T1 4T2 6T3 2T1 4T2 6T3 8T4 2T1 4T2 6T3 8T4
A2 A2 A2 A2 NO
A2 2T1 4T2 6T3 8T4 14
Combination = A50 ... A75-30-11 + CAL5-11 Combination = A45 ... A75-40-00 + CA5-10 Combination 10
22 10
E0630D
A1
1L1
A1
3L2
A2
5L3 1L1
A1
3L2
A2
5L3 1L1
A1
3L2
A2
5L3 A2 2T1 4T2 6T3
V d.c.
{ A2 A3
U
NO 13X AE50 ... AE110-30-00
C C C TAE50/75-30-00
NC 21X 35 X 36 X
D D C
L L L
5 NC 22X 5 5 A1 1L1 3L2 5L3 13X 21X
NO 14X NO NC 1 L1 2 T1
E0376D1
E0375D1
E0631D
2T1 4T2 6T3
E0628D
2T1 4T2 6T3 2T1 4T2 6T3
A0498D1G
A3 A3 A3 NO NC
A2 2T1 4T2 6T3 14X 22X
AE50 ... AE75-30-00 AE50 ... AE75-30-11 AE95/110-30-00 AE50 ... AE110-30-11
TAE50/75-30-00 TAE50/75-30-11 - TAE50/75-30-11 Coil wiring
A1 1 R3 R5 7
A1 A2 A1 A2 A1 A2
E0633D
1L1 3L2 5L3 1 R3 R5 7 1L1 3L2 5L3 7L4
NO 13X A2 2 R4 R6 8
NC 21X
C C C AE45/75-22-00
C D D
L L
-
L
NC 22X 5 5
5 A1 1L1 3L2 5L3 7L4
NO 14X
E0385D1
E0386D1
E0632D
E0629D
A1 A1 A1
1L1 3L2 5L3 21 1L1 3L2 5L3 13 1L1 3L2 5L3
NC NO
13 21 31 43
NO NC NC NO
A0442D1
A0452D1
E0635D
E0634D
E0637D
2T1 4T2 6T3 22 2T1 4T2 6T3 14 2T1 4T2 6T3
A2 A2 A2 NC NO NO NC NC NO
A2 2T1 4T2 6T3 22 A2 2T1 4T2 6T3 14 A2 2T1 4T2 6T3 14 22 32 44
BC9 ... BC25-30-01 BC9 ... BC25-30-10 BC18-30-22 BC9 ... BC25-30-01 BC9 ... BC25-30-10 BC18-30-22
TBC9 ... TBC25-30-01 TBC9 ... TBC25-30-10 BC30-30-22 TBC9 ...TBC25-30-01 TBC9 ... TBC25-30-10 BC30-30-22
TBC30-30-22 TBC30-30-22
A1 A1 A1
1L1 3L2 5L3 1 R3 R5 7 1L1 3L2 5L3 7L4
A0453D1
E0354D1
A0454D1
E0638D
E0636D
BC30-30-00 BC9 ... BC25-22-00 BC9 ... BC25-40-00 BC30-30-00 BC9 ... BC25-22-00 BC9 ... BC25-40-00
TBC30-30-00 TBC9 ... TBC25-22-00 TBC9 ... TBC25-40-00 TBC30-30-00 TBC9 ... TBC25-22-00 TBC9 ... TBC25-40-00
8
3.3.2 - Other possible contact combinations with auxiliary contacts added by the user
A1 1L1 3L2 5L3 13 21 33
NO NC NO
A1 A1 A1 A1
E0640DG
1L1 3L2 5L3 13 1L1 3L2 5L3 13 1L1 3L2 5L3 1L1 3L2 5L3
NO NC NO
NO NO A2 2T1 4T2 6T3 14 22 34
21 33 2- 3- 4- 5- -1 -3 13 21 1- 2- 3- 4- -3 -1 Combination 21
NC NO = + NC + NO NO NC = + NO + NC
22 34 2- 3- 4- 5- -2 -4 14 22 1- 2- 3- 4- -4 -2
A1 1L1 3L2 5L3 13 21
NO NC
NO NO
A0437D1G
A0439D1G
E0639DG
2T1 4T2 6T3 14 2T1 4T2 6T3 14 2T1 4T2 6T3 2T1 4T2 6T3
A2 A2 A2 A2 NO NC
A2 2T1 4T2 6T3 14 22
Combination = BC9 ... BC25-30-10 + CA5-01 + CA5-10 Combination = BC30-30-00 + CA5-10 + CA5-01 Combination 11
21 11
21 21 31 21
22 22 32 22
14 14 44 14
2T1 4T2 6T3 2T1 4T2 6T3 2T1 4T2 6T3
A0456D1
A0458D1
A0457D1
EH ... -30-11 EH ... -30-22 EH ... -30-11
A1 1 3 5 13 21 A1 1 3 5 13 21 31 43 A1 1 3 5 13 21
A0432D1
A0433D1
A0432D1
A2 2 4 6 14 22 A2 2 4 6 14 22 32 44 A2 2 4 6 14 22
Other possible contact combinations with auxiliary contacts added by the user
EH 145 ........................................................... EH 800 - A.C. Operated EH 145 ................................. EH 800 - D.C. Operated
1L1 3L2 5L3 1L1 3L2 5L3 1L1 3L2 5L3 1L1 3L2 5L3
53 13 43 13 43 53 53 13 13 53
61 21 31 21 31 61 61 21 21 61
= + = +
62 22 32 22 32 62 62 22 22 62
54 14 44 14 44 54 54 14 14 54
2T1 4T2 6T3 2T1 4T2 6T3 2T1 4T2 6T3 2T1 4T2 6T3
E0642DG
E0641DG
A1 1 3 5 13 21 31 43 53 61 A1 1 3 5 13 21 31 43 53 61 A1 1 3 5 13 21 47 53 61 A1 1 3 5 13 21 47 53 61
E0644DG
= +
E0643DG
= +
A2 2 4 6 14 22 32 44 54 62 A2 2 4 6 14 22 32 44 54 62 A2 2 4 6 14 22 48 54 62 A2 2 4 6 14 22 48 54 62
Wiring details for 40–400 Hz coil D.C. contactor coil wiring details
with built-in rectifier
A1 A2
A2
A1
35 36 35 36
Right Right
-E
47 48 hand side
V d.c.
{ R1
A1 A2
-E
47 48 hand side
13 14 13 14
35 36 13 14
-A Left -A Left
21 22 hand side 21 22 21 22 hand side
47 48
1/L1 2/T1 1/L1 2/T1
1 L1 2 T1
3/L2 4/T2 3/L2 4/T2
A1156D1G
A1154D1G
A0472D3G
3 L2 4 T2
5/L3 6/T3 5/L3 6/T3
5 L3 6 T3
3-pole EH 175 ... EH 300 3-pole EH 145, EH 370 ... EH 800 3-pole EH 175 ... EH 300
CAL 16-11 and CCL 16-11 E Auxiliary Contacts: see page 8/3
21 21
22 22
A1 1 3 5 7 13 21 A1 1 3 5 7 13 21
14 14
2T1 4T2 6T3 8T4 2T1 4T2 6T3 8T4
A0432D3
A0432D3
A0691D5
A0691D4
A2 2 4 6 8 14 22 A2 2 4 6 8 14 22
EK contactors equipped with additionnal auxiliary contacts: see examples for EH contactors page 8/8.
Wiring details for 40–400 Hz coil D.C. contactor coil wiring details
with built-in rectifier
A1 A2
A2
A1
35 36 35 36
Right Right
-E -E
47 48 hand side 47 48 hand side
13 14 13 14
-A Left -A Left
21 22 hand side hand side
21 22
5/L3 6/T3
A1159D1G
5/L3 6/T3
A1160D1G
CAL 16-11 and CCL 16-11 E Auxiliary Contacts: see page 8/3
TA and T
Thermal O/L Relays
R
OR
Man/Aut
98 97 96 95
TEST
Man/Aut
R
O R 2/T1 4/T2 6/T3 Man/Aut
98 97 96 95
R
OR
8
98 97 96 95
A0471D1
A0467D1
2 4 6
A0468D1
2 4 6
TA 25 DU, TA 42 DU,
TA 75 DU, TA 80 DU TA 110 DU, T 200 DU T 450 DU/SU, T 900 DU/SU
L1 L2 L3 95 97
R
1 / L1 3 / L2 5 / L3 1 / L1 3 / L2 5 / L3
T
R 95 97 R 95 97 1 3 5
T T
2 4 6 96 98
A0470D1
E0649D
96 98 96 98
T1 T2 T3
A0469D1
2 / T1 4 / T2 6 / T3 2 / T1 4 / T2 6 / T3
Star-Delta Starters
Diagrams
L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3
1 3 5 1 3 5 1 3 5 1 3 5
1 3 5 1 3 5
KM2 / (Y) KM3 / ( ) KM1 / (L) KM1 / (L) KM3 / ( ) KM2 / (Y)
2 4 6 2 4 6
2 4 6 2 4 6 2 4 6 2 4 6
1 3 5 1 3 5
2 4 6 2 4 6
W2 W1 W1 W2
V2 V1 V1 V2
U2 U1 U1 U2
W2 W1 W1 W2
V2 V1 V1 V2
E0514D1
U2 U1 U1 U2
E0898D
Control circuit diagrams
A 9 to EH 550 Contactors EH 700 and EH 800 Contactors
remote control remote control
KM3 : 5/L3 Us
Us O
95
O R
R
95
R R
FR1
FR1
96
96
96
96
O
O
13
13
13
13
O
1
O
I
23
I
KM2 KM1 KA9
I KM1 I
14
14
14
24
A1
KT
15
24
t1 t1+t2
A1
15
KT
A2
16
18
t1 t1+t2 21
A2
21 16
21 18
21
21
KM3 KM2
13
13
A1 22
A1 22
A1
A1 22
A1 22
14
A1 14
A2
A2
A2
A2
N
A2
E1128D
KM3 : 3/L2
Y L
●
Contactors ................................................................ Section 2
Contactor Relays ..................................................... Section 3
●
●
Accessories ............................................................ Section 4
Thermal O/L Relays ................................................ Section 5
Dimensions
● Contactors
● Contactor Relays
● Thermal O/L Relays
● Accessories
Contents
Dimensions for Contactors with Thermal O/L Relays and with Accessories
– A 9, A 12, A 16 + Accessories + Thermal O/L Relay .......................................................... 9/ 2
– A 26, + Accessories + Thermal O/L Relay .......................................................................... 9/ 4
– A 30, A 40, + Accessories + Thermal O/L Relay ................................................................ 9/ 6
– A 50 (3P), A 63, A 75 (3P), + Accessories + Thermal O/L Relay ....................................... 9/ 8
– A 45, A 50 (4P), A 75 (4P), + Accessories ........................................................................ 9/ 10
– A 95, A 110 + Accessories + Thermal O/L Relay ............................................................. 9/ 12
– AE 50 (3P), AE 63, AE 75 (3P), TAE 50 (3P), TAE 75 (3P) + Accessories + O/L Relay .. 9/ 16
– AE 45, AE 50 (4P), AE 75 (4P), TAE 45, TAE 50 (4P), TAE 75 (4P) + Accessories ........ 9/ 18
– A E 95, A E 110, TA E 95, TA E 110 + Accessories + Thermal O/L Relay ......................... 9/ 20
– AF ..................................................................................................................................... 9/ 22
– GA 75, GAE 75 ................................................................................................................. 9/ 23
– UA, UA..-R ............................................................................................................... 9/ 24, 9/ 25
Dimensions for Contactor Relays and Mini Contactors with Thermal O/L Relays
and with Accessories.
– N ......................................................................................................................................... 9/ 2
– BC …, TBC …, KC …, TKC … + Accessories + Thermal O/L Relay ............................... 9/ 14
– B 6, BC 6, B 7, BC 7, K 6, KC 6 + Accessories + Thermal O/L Relay ....................... Section 6
Only major dimensions are quoted on the drawings contained in this section.
Detailed dimension drawings on Autocad DWG / DXF formats available on request.
Detailed dimension drawings on Autocad DWG / DXF formats available on request.
74 100.5
(1)
68 68 10
5.5 5.5
35 mm EN 50022
35 mm EN 50022
74
47
74
E0106D
E0107D
E0102D
E0103D
44 (1) 44 4
4 10
74
107
68 (1)
68 10
5.5
5.5
35 mm EN 50022
35 mm EN 50022
74
74
47
E0105D
E0109D
E0108D
E0104D
(1)
12 44 4 10 44 4
74
68
127
41.5 5.5
(1)
68 10
21
5.5
35 mm EN 50022
35 mm EN 50022
74
74
47
E0755D
E0114D
E0113D
E0756D
44 4
(1)
44 4
10
145
(1)
68 10
35
5.5
ø 4.5
(M4) 4
35 mm EN 50022
50
74
60
34
E0757D
E0101D
E0758D
4.5 4.5 44 4
74
68
5.5 ø 4.5
(M4)
35 mm EN 50022
74
50
60
E0110D1
E0112D
E0111D
(1)
103 4 10 4.5 35 59 4.5
74.5
68
5.5 ø 4.5
(M4)
35 mm EN 50022
74
50
60
E0110D1
E0116D
E0115D
(1)
103 4 10 4.5 35 59 4.5
44 74 35
ø 4.5
(M4)
35 mm EN 50022
50
74
60
4
133
10
E0101D
4.5 4.5
E0759D
1
14*
6
E0760D
95
* For TA 25 DU 32 only
(1) Note : no recommended distance to earth applicable to "N" contactor relays.
A 26 A 26
+ CA 5 Front-Mounted 1-Pole Auxiliary Contact Block
93.6 119.8
9 6.3 9 10
35 mm EN 50022
35 mm EN 50022
47
90
90
E0123D
E0122D
E0118D
E0119D
54 4 10 54 4
A 26 A 26
+ CAL 5 Side-Mounted 2-Pole Auxiliary Contact Block + CA 5 Front-Mounted 4-Pole Auxiliary Contact Block
93.6 126.3
9 6.3 9 10
35 mm EN 50022
35 mm EN 50022
74
90
90
47
E0124D
E0120D
E0125D
E0121D
12 54 4 10 54 4
A 26 A 26
+ RA 5 Interface Relay + TP Pneumatic Timer
93.6
41.5
9
146.3
21
6.3 9 10
35 mm EN 50022
35 mm EN 50022
90
47
90
E0761D
E0762D
E0131D
E0132D
54 4 10 54 4
Drilling Plan A 26
+ WB 75-A Mechanical Latching Unit
164.3
45
ø 4.2 9
(M4)
4
35 mm EN 50022
90
70
80
34
E0763D
E0764D
E0117D
4.5 4.5 54 4 10
A 26 Drilling Plan
+ VE 5-1 Electrical and Mechanical Interlock Unit
93.6
9 6.3 ø 4.2
(M4)
35 mm EN 50022
90
70
80
E0128D
E0127D
E0126D
123 4 10
4.5 45 69 4.5
A 26 Drilling Plan
+ VM 5-1 Mechanical Interlock Unit
93.6
9 6.3 ø 4.2
(M4)
35 mm EN 50022
90
70
80
E0129D
E0130D
E0126D
123 4 10
4.5 45 69 4.5
A 26 Drilling Plan
+ TA 25 DU Thermal O/L Relay
93.6
54 45
9 ø 4.2
(M4)
90
4
70
80
35 mm EN 50022
147
10
E0117D
4.5 4.5
E0765D
15.4
14*
6
E0766D
109.4
For TA 25 DU 32 only
*
A 30, A 40 A 30, A 40
+ CA 5 Front-Mounted 1-Pole Auxiliary Contact Block
108.3 134.5
9 6.3 9 10
35 mm EN 50022
35 mm EN 50022
90
47
90
E0137D
E0134D
E0138D
E0133D
54 4 10 54 4
A 30, A 40 A 30, A 40
+ CAL 5 Side-Mounted 2-Pole Auxiliary Contact Block + CA 5 Front-Mounted 4-Pole Auxiliary Contact Block
108.3 141
9 6.3 9 10
35 mm EN 50022
35 mm EN 50022
47
74
90
90
E0140D
E0136D
E0139D
E0135D
12 54 4 10 54 4
A 30, A 40 A 30, A 40
+ RA 5 Interface Relay + TP Pneumatic Timer
108.3
41.5 9
161
21
6.3 9 10
35 mm EN 50022
35 mm EN 50022
90
90
47
E0768D
E0767D
E0144D
E0145D
54 4 10 54 4
179
45
ø 4.2 9
(M4)
4
35 mm EN 50022
90
70
80
34
E0769D
E0770D
E0117D
54 4 10
4.5 4.5
108.3
9 6.3 ø 4.2
(M4)
35 mm EN 50022
90
70
80
E0143D
E0142D
E0126D
123 4 10 4.5 45 69 4.5
9 6.3 ø 4.2
(M4)
35 mm EN 50022
90
70
80
E0146D
E0147D
E0126D
123 4 10
4.5 45 69 4.5
A 30 Drilling Plan
+ TA 25 DU Thermal O/L Relay
108.3
54 45
9 ø 4.2
(M4)
4
90
35 mm EN 50022
70
80
149.5
10
E0117D
4.5 4.5
E0771D
14*
9.7 6
E0772D
103.7
* For TA 25 DU 32 only
A 40 Drilling Plan
+ TA 42 DU Thermal O/L Relay
108.3
54 45
9 ø 4.2
(M4)
9
90
4
35 mm EN 50022
70
80
155.5
10
E0117D
4.5 4.5
E0773D
1.8 6
E0774D
112.8
35 mm x 15 EN 50022
35 mm x15 EN 50022
6 6.5 6 6.5
110
110
4
47
4
75 mm EN 50023
75 mm EN 50023
E0151D
E0165D
E0163D
E0152D
70 10 10 70 10 10
35 mm x 15 EN 50022
108 108
35 mm x15 EN 50022
6 6.5 6 6.5
110
110
74
4 4
47
75 mm EN 50023
75 mm EN 50023
E0150D
E0154D
E0141D
E0153D
12 70 10 10 70 10 10
108
108
35 mm x15 EN 50022
21
6 6.5 6 6.5
110
110
4
47
4
75 mm EN 50023
75 mm EN 50023
E0775D
E0776D
E0158D
E0159D
70 10 10 70 10 10
178.5
35 mm x15 EN 50022
ø 6.2
6 6.5
(M6)
5
4
110
90
4
75 mm EN 50023
34
E0148D
E0778D
E0777D
5
5 60 5 70 10 10
108
35 mm x 15 EN 50022
6 6.5 ø 6.2
(M6)
5
110
100
4
90
75 mm EN 50023
E0157D
E0156D
E0155D
5
155 10 10 5 60 85 5
70 108
35 mm x15 EN 50022
ø 6.2
6 6.5
(M6)
5
110
90
4
75 mm EN 50023
175.5
10
E0148D
5
5 60 5
E0170D
3 6
E0186D
114
35 mm x 15 EN 50022
119.5 119.5
35 mm x 15 EN 50022
6 6.5 6 6.5
110
110
47
4
75 mm EN 50023
75 mm EN 50023
E0174D
E0172D
E0173D
E0175D
92 10 10 92 10 10
35 mm x 15 EN 50022
119.5 119.5
35 mm x 15 EN 50022
6 6.5 6 6.5
110
110
47
74
4 4
75 mm EN 50023
75 mm EN 50023
E0179D
E0178D
E0177D
E0176D
12 92 10 10 92 10 10
41.5 119.5
119.5
35 mm x 15 EN 50022
6 6.5
21
6 6.5
110
110
47
4 4
75 mm EN 50023
75 mm EN 50023
E0184D
E0183D
E0780D
E0779D
92 10 10 92 10 10
ø 6.2
(M6) 6 6.5
4
100
110
90
4
75 mm EN 50023
34
E0171D
E0781D
E0782D
5 82 5 92 10 10
119.5
35 mm x 15 EN 50022
ø 6.2
6 6.5
(M6)
110
100
90
4
75 mm EN 50023
E0182D
E0181D
E0180D
199 10 10
5 82 107 5
6 6
148
75 mm EN 50023
75 mm EN 50023
148
47
E0786D
E0784D
E0785D
E0783D
90 10 20 90 10 20
156,5
123.5 123.5
6.5 6.5
6 6
75 mm EN 50023
148
148
75 mm EN 50023
74
47
E0788D
E0790D
E0789D
E0787D
12 90 10 20 90 10 20
A 95, A 110
+ RA 5 Interface Relay
41.5 123.5
21
6.5
6
75 mm EN 50023
148
E0792D
E0791D
90 10 20
Drilling Plan
ø 6.2
(M6)
126
136
E0215D9
78
75 mm EN 50023
148
126
136
E0794D
E0793D
78 78
E0795D
195 10 20
183
90 123.5 ø 6.2
(M6)
6.5
6
75 mm EN 50023
126
136
148
214
E0215D9
20
78
E0826D
4
E0827D
114
90 ø 6.2
123.5
(M6)
6.5
6
75 mm EN 50023
126
136
148
258
E0215D9
20
78
9
6
E0828D
E0829D
5
131
35 mm EN 50022
H
H
47
E0800D
E0798D
9,5 P3 9,5
B E0799D B
P1 P1
E0801D
P2
Types B H P P1 P2 P3
KC, TKC 4-pole
Types B H P P1 P2 P3
BC 9, TBC 9 44 81 114 94.5 108 15
BC 16, TBC 16 KC, TKC 8-pole 44 81 147 94.5 129.7 15
BC 25, TBC 25 54 81 120 96.5 114 20 BC 18* 44 81 153 96 135.7 20
BC 30*, TBC 30* 54 90 126 98 120 20 BC 30*, TBC 30* 54 90 159 98 141.7 20
* 3-Pole Contactors * 3-Pole Contactors
5 5
35 mm EN 50022
35 mm EN 50022
47
47
H
H
E0804D
E0802D
9,5 9,5
E0803D
B B
P1 P1
E0805D
P2
Types B H P P1 P2
KC, TKC, BC 9, TBC 9 Types B H P P1 P2
BC 16, TBC 16 44 81 140.5 94.5 128.5 KC, BC 9, BC 16 44 81 147 94.5 129.7
BC 25, TBC 25 54 81 146.5 96.5 134.5 BC 25 54 81 153 96.5 136
BC 30*, TBC 30* 54 90 152.5 98 140.5 BC 30* 54 90 159 98 141.7
* 3-Pole Contactors * 3-Pole Contactors
KC, BC 9 … BC 30 KC, BC 9 … BC 30
+ TP Pneumatic Timer + WB 75-A Mechanical Latching Unit
P P
26 5
5
35 mm EN 50022
35 mm EN 50022
4
47
H
34
E0808D
E0806D
9,5 B 9,5
B
P1 P1
E0809D
E0807D
P2 P2
Types B H P P1 P2 Types B H P P1 P2
KC, BC 9, BC 16 44 81 167 94.5 133.5 KC, BC 9, BC 16 44 81 185 94.5 157
BC 25 54 81 173 96.5 139.5 BC 25 54 81 191 96.5 163
BC 30* 54 90 179 98 145.5 BC 30* 54 90 197 98 169
* 3-Pole Contactors * 3-Pole Contactors
Detailed dimension drawings on Autocad DWG / DXF formats available on request.
35 mm EN 50022
H2
H1
H
60
70
E0812D
E0813D
35 20 35
5
E0810D
5
45 10 45
E0811D
B 9,5
P1
KC, TKC, BC 9, BC 16, TBC 9, TBC 16 BC 25, TBC 25, BC 30, TBC 30
Types B H P P1 Types H1 H2
KC, TKC, BC 9, TBC 9, BC 25, TBC 25 60 70
BC 16, TBC 16 99 81 128 94.5 BC 30*, TBC 30* 70 80
BC 25, TBC 25 109 81 134 96.5 * 3-Pole Contactors
P1
B P P2
B1 F1 F1
35 mm EN 50022
35 mm EN 50022
H2
47
H1
H3
F F
P4 P4
E0814D
14*
14*
B2
E0816D
E0815D
P3 6 P3 6
* For TA 25 DU 32 only
Drilling Plans (for side by side mounting - see recommendations for BC .. types pages 2/14, 2/17 ; TBC .. page 2/24 ; KC .. page 3/5 ; TKC .. page 3/8).
4.5
4.5 4.5
9
60
70
70
80
60
70
E0817D
E0819D
E0818D
35 mm x 15 EN 50022
35 mm x15 EN 50022
6 6.5 6 6.5
110
110
4
47
4
75 mm EN 50023
75 mm EN 50023
E0165D
E0152D
E0166D
E0162D
10 10 10 10
82 82
35 mm x 15 EN 50022
108 108
35 mm x15 EN 50022
6 6.5 6 6.5
110
110
74
4 4
47
75 mm EN 50023
75 mm EN 50023
E0150D
E0154D
E0161D
E0164D
10 10 10 10
12 82 82
108 178.5
35 mm x15 EN 50022
6 6.5 6
4
110
110
4
47
4
75 mm EN 50023
75 mm EN 50023
34
E0797D
E0159D
E0796D
E0169D
10 10 10 10
82 82
Drilling Plan
ø 6.2
(M6)
5
90
E0148D
5
5 60 5
35 mm x 15 EN 50022
ø 6.2
6 6.5 (M6)
100
90
110
4
75 mm EN 50023
E0155D
E0168D
5
E0167D
5 60 85 5
10 10
179
82 108
35 mm x15 EN 50022
6 6.5 ø 6.2
(M6)
5
110
90
4
75 mm EN 50023
175.5
10
E0148D
5
5 60 5
E0820D
3 6
E0186D
114
35 mm x 15 EN 50022
119.5 119.5
35 mm x 15 EN 50022
6 6.5 6 6.5
110
110
47
4 4
75 mm EN 50023
75 mm EN 50023
E0175D
E0173D
E0187D
E0185D
10 10 10 10
104 104
35 mm x 15 EN 50022
119.5 119.5
35 mm x 15 EN 50022
6 6.5 6 6.5
110
47
74
4
110
75 mm EN 50023
75 mm EN 50023
E0179D
E0177D
10 10
E0189D
10 10
E0191D
12 104 104
172
35 mm x 15 EN 50022
119.5 190
35 mm x 15 EN 50022
6 6.5 6
4
110
110
47
4 4
75 mm EN 50023
75 mm EN 50023
34
E0822D
E0184D
E0821D
10 10 10 10
E0196D
104 104
Drilling Plan
ø 6.2
(M6)
100
90
E0171D
5 82 5
119.5
35 mm x 15 EN 50022
ø 6.2
6 6.5
(M6)
100
110
90
4
75 mm EN 50023
E0195D
E0180D
10 10
E0194D
5 82 107 5
223
150
123.5 123.5
6.5 6.5
6 6
148
75 mm EN 50023
148
75 mm EN 50023
47
E0784D
E0786D
E0823D
E0824D
102 10 20 102 10 20
6 6
148
75 mm EN 50023
75 mm EN 50023
148
74
47
E0788D
E0790D
E0825D
E0833D
12 102 10 20 102 10 20
Drilling Plan
ø 6.2
(M6)
126
136
E0215D9
78
12 195 12
90 123.5 ø 6.2 ø 6.2
6.5 (M6) (M6)
75 mm EN 50023
148
126
136
E0832D
E0788D
78 78
E0795D
10 20
183
90 12 123.5 ø 6.2
(M6)
6.5
6
75 mm EN 50023
126
136
148
214
E0215D9
20
78
E0830D
4
E0827D
114
ø 6.2
90 12 123.5
(M6)
6.5
6
75 mm EN 50023
126
136
148
9
258
E0215D9
20
78
6
E0831D
E0829D
5
131
35 mm x15 EN 50022
82 (2) ø 6.2
6 6.5 (M6)
5
90
110
4
74
75 mm EN 50023
E0148D
E0150D
E0149D
5
70 (1) 10 10 5 60 5
ø 6.2
6 6.5
(M6)
100
110
90
75 mm EN 50023
E0173D
E0171D
E0172D
92 10 10 5 82 5
6
126
148
75 mm EN 50023
E0281D
E0215D
E0280D
90 (1) 10 78
35 mm x15 EN 50022
ø 6.2
6 6.5
11
(M6)
5
110
90
4
75 mm EN 50023
E0148D
11
5
E0834D
E0835D
10 10 5 60 5
70 72
ø 6.2
6 6.5
11
(M6)
5
110
90
4
75 mm EN 50023
E0148D
11
5
E0836D
E0835D
10 10 5 60 5
82 72
UA 26 Drilling Plan
93.6
45
9 6.3 ø 4.2
(M4)
35 mm EN 50022
90
70
80
E0118D
E0119D
E0117D
54 4 10 4.5 4.5
UA 30 Drilling Plan
108.3
45
9 6.3 ø 4.2
(M4)
35 mm EN 50022
90
70
80
E0134D
E0133D
E0117D
54 4 10 4.5 4.5
6 6.5 ø 6.2
(M6)
5
110
110
74
4
90
75 mm EN 50023
E0150D
E0163D
E0148D
E0141D
70 12 70 10 10 5 60 5
6
148
148
75 mm EN 50023
74
126
136
E0215D9
E0788D
E0787D
E0783D
90 12 90 10 20 78
UA 16 .. -R Drilling plan
105.5
68
35
5.5 ø 4.5
(M4)
35 mm EN 50022
+10
50
60
74
47
140
E0101D
4 4.5 4.5
E0890D
E0891D
44
UA 26 .. -R Drilling plan
125
87,3
9 45
ø 4.2
(M4)
35 mm EN 50022
+10
90
47
140
70
80
E0117D
E0893D
4 4.5 4.5
E0892D
54
UA 30 .. -R Drilling plan
139.5
102
9 45
ø 4.2
(M4)
35 mm EN 50022
140 ±5
90
47
70
80
E0117D
E0895D
4 4.5 4.5
E0894D
54
10 ø 6.2
(M6)
5
9
110
114
160 ±5
90
4
47
75 mm EN 50023
E0148D
5
E0897D
6 5 60 5
E0896D
70
5
20
35 mm EN 50022
Types B B1 H H1 P P1 P2 P3 P4
KC
H1
BC 16
BC 25 54 3 81 110 120 96.5 114 20 62
BC 30* 54 3 90 120 126 98 120 20 60
E0839D
9,5 P3
B E0840D
B1 B1
P1 * 3-Pole Contactors.
BL 5-F, BL 5-L CB 5
Fuse Holder, Lamp Holder Blocks Impulse Contact Block
9.8 27.8 9.8 23.2
36
36
E0841D
E0842D
E0855D
E0856D
L
10
block
30
15
175
20.5 57.5
E0845D
Types L L1
15
RT 7 85 200
RV-BC6 135 235
RT 7, RV-BC 6 RT 5, RV 5, RC 5 RC-EH
13
189
174
E0837D
E0857D
LK 75 A1
Terminals for Control Lead Connections
E0838D
ø 6.5 15
13 19
11
10.1 10.1 10.1 1.6
27.2
18.2
E0900D
E1101D
13.2
Being Prepared
A 277D
43.1 14.8
Fig. 1 Fig. 4
13.5 13.5 1.6
1 1 Designation Kit
2 pieces fig. 1
18.6
13.2
E0851D
40 14.8
Fig. 2 Fig. 5
LC 25-B1 2 pieces fig. 3
+ 2 pieces fig. 5
12.5 12.5 12.5 1.6
LC 16-A 2 pieces fig. 4
+ 2 pieces fig. 6
Faston 6.4/2.8 LC 26-A1 2 pieces fig. 3
27.2
+ 2 pieces fig. 6
18.2
13.2
E0850D
4.8
LC 26-A2 2 pieces fig. 3
+ 2 pieces fig. 4
A 279D
50.3 14.8
+ 2 pieces fig. 6
Fig. 3 Fig. 6
23 65
9
35 mm EN 50022
85
45
E0849D
E0848D
P1
91 A 119
91 A 121
91 A 123
ø 4.2 ø 5.2 E ø 5.2
(M4) (M5) (M5)
EH 175 to EH 300, EHL 210 and EHL 300 Contactors Drilling Plan
A A P
B
C K2 P1 T1
D
G T
ø 6.2M6
pour
(M6)
C1 H1 H
A_115
E
K1 ø 6.2
F M6
91 A 115
A_120
A_122
ø 6.2
ø 4.2 ø 6.2 E
(M4) (M6)
(M6)
PE = M10 earthing screw
34.5
A_662D
EK 110 to EK 210, EKL 150 and EKL 210 Contactors Drilling Plan
A B A
B1 P
C K2 T1
P1
G D
T
H
91 A 115
C1
H1
ø 6.2
(M6)
E
K1
ø 6.2
For(M6)
M6 F
Detailed dimension drawings on Autocad DWG / DXF formats available on request.
C1
ø 6.2
(M6)
A_691D1G
A_691D3F
A_691D2F
C
ø 6.2
F G
K1
E C2 (M6)
PE = M10 earthing screw
Dimensions
Type A B B1 B2 C C1 C2 D E F G H H1 K1 K2 P P1 T T1
1) 2) 3) 4) 5) 6) min. 8)
➞ F1 F1 =F
EH 145 11 124 – 151 110 120 125 42 127 136 147 11 40 42 20 140 171 10 – 143 91 19 4
EH 175 12 136 – – 120 140 137 47 – 149 161 11 15 45 20 156 198 10 134 169 103.5 10 5
EH 210 12 136 – – 120 140 137 47 – 149 161 11 15 45 20 156 198 10 134 169 103.5 10 5
EH 260 10 176 – – 160 140 177 53 186 187 197 11 30 62 25 156 207 12.5 134 175 103.7 10 5
EH 300 10 176 – – 160 140 177 53 186 187 197 11 30 62 25 156 207 12.5 134 175 103.7 10 5
EH 370 11 198 – 226 170 200 199 65 201 210 221 11 40 67 25 223 272 12.5 – 226 140 23 7) 6
EH 550 11 198 – 226 170 200 199 65 201 210 221 11 40 67 25 223 272 12.5 – 226 140 23 7) 6
EH 700 9 244 – 270 220 200 246 82 246 254 263 11 40 82 40 223 294 20 – 226 140 23 7) 6
EH 800 9 244 – 270 220 200 246 82 276 254 263 11 40 92 50 223 344 20 – 226 140 23 7) 6
EK 110 10.5 165 136 – 120 140 166 43 – 177 187 6.6 40 41 15 156 156 7.5 134 154.5 102.3 10 4
EK 150 10.5 165 136 – 120 140 168 42 168 177 187 11 40 42 20 156 172 10 134 154.5 102.3 10 4
EK 175 12 201 176 – 160 140 202 67 – 214 226 11 15 45 20 156 198 10 134 172 106.7 10 5
EK 210 12 201 176 – 160 140 202 67 – 214 226 11 15 45 20 156 198 10 134 172 106.7 10 5
EK 370 11 270 244 296 220 200 271 70 – 282 293 11 40 67 25 223 272 12.5 – 225.5 139.5 23 7) 6
EK 550 11 270 244 296 220 200 271 70 – 282 293 11 40 67 25 223 272 12.5 – 225.5 139.5 23 7) 6
1) Dimension for extra auxiliary contact block.
2) Minimum distance for contactors mounted side by side. Makes space for two auxiliary contact blocks between the contactors.
3) C2 distance makes F1 = F.
4) Includes space for three auxiliary contact blocks between the contactors.
5) Includes space for four auxiliary contact blocks between the contactors.
6) Screw, nut and washer included.
7) Damping elements are included.
8) Minimum distance to remove coil.
Notes :
Values quoted for C2 and F1 are not applicable for D.C. operated contactors EH 145 - EH 370 - EH 550 - EH 700 - EH 800 - EK 370 - EK 550.
For a same rating EH and EHL contactors dimensions are the same.
For a same rating EK and EKL contactors dimensions are the same.
PN 145-21 EH 145 – – EH 145 280 260 160 6.8 145.0 180 148 96
PN 210-22 EH 175/210 – – EH 175/210 340 320 180 6.8 156.0 200 173 108
EH 175/210 – – EH 145 340 320 180 6.8 150.5 200 173/150 108/98
PN 300-22 EH 260/300 – – EH 260/300 430 400 200 8.0 194.5 230 185 114
EH 260 – – EH 175/210 430 400 200 8.0 175.5 230 185/178 114/113
C1
H1
Terminals
H
34.5
A661D
A660D
A662D
D1 F F1 G D=7 E G K1
(M6)
Dimensions
Type B C C1 C3 D1 E F F1 G H H1 K1 P P1 T1
EH 370 ...550 480 450 265 – 11 40 67 240 25 295 272 12.5 275.5 189.5 6
EH 700 580 550 265 – 11 40 82 290 40 295 294 20 275.3 189.5 6
EH 800 580 550 265 34.5 11 40 92 290 50 295 344 20 275.5 189.5 6
34.5
A662D
G K1
(M6)
Dimensions
Type B B1 C C1 C3 D1 F G H H1 K1 P P1 T1
EH 145 160 167 140 120 – 6.6 41 15 140 156 10 202 97 4
EH 175, EH 210 180 178 162 142 – 11 45 20 160 198 10 225 109 5
EH 260, EH 300 244 232 218 135 – 11 62 25 165 207 12.5 241 119 5
EH 370, EH 550 240 240 210 255 – 11 67 25 285 272 12.5 296 146.5 6
EH 700 290 290 260 255 – 11 82 40 285 294 20 296 146.5 6
EH 800 290 290 260 255 34.5 11 92 50 285 344 20 296 146.5 6
Dimensions
Mechanical For Contactors B C C1 C2 H P P1
Interlock up down min max min max
VHV 145 EH 145 ▼–
–▼ EH 145 135.5 66 395 120 120 357 686 143 91
VHV 210 EH 175/210 ▼–
–▼ EH 175/210 147 73 375 140 140 411 713 168 103
VHV 300 EH 260/300 ▼–
–▼ EH 260/300 190 82 375 140 140 429 722 178 107 1)
VHV 210A EH 175/210 ▼–
–▼ EH 145 147/135.5 69.5 385 140 120 384 699.5 168/145 2) 103/93 2)
1) Damping elements are included.
2) Spacers are included for EH 145 contactors.
C1
M5
EH 175/210 – – EH 175/210 73 375 140 140 120 EH 145
M6
C
M6
EH 175,
M6
C2
EH 210
C2
E0852D
E0853D
Dimensions Fig. B
C3
Contactors Cmin Cmax C1 C2 C3
M6
C
Dimensions
Contactors Cmin Cmax C1 C2 C3
E0854D
Fig. C
Dimensions
Mechanical Interlock For Contactors B C C1 D F H P P1
PN 210-22 EK 110 – – EK 110 340 320 180 6.8 185 200 159 107
EK 150 – – EK 150 340 320 180 6.8 185 200 159 107
EK 150 – – EK 110 340 320 180 6.8 186.5 200 159 107
PN 300-22 EK 175/210 – – EK 175/210 430 400 200 6.8 223.5 230 182 117
VK 210 A EK 175/210 – – EK 110 390 360 200 6.8 210.5 230 182.5 117.5
EK 175/210 – – EK 150 390 360 200 6.8 209 230 182.5 117.5
VH 800 EK 370/500 – – EK 370/500 580 550 265 7.0 240 295 275.5 189.5
A_872
Dimensions
Mechanical For Contactors B C C C1 C2 H H P P1
Interlock min. max. min. max.
VKV 150 EK 110 – – EK 110 178 31 375 140 140 327 671 154 102
EK 150 – – EK 150 178 47 375 140 140 359 687 154 102
EK 150 – – EK 110 178 39 375 140 140 343 679 154 102
VHV 300 EK 175 – – EK 175 217 73 375 140 140 411 713 175 1) 110 1)
EK 210 – – EK 210 217 73 375 140 140 411 713 175 1) 110 1)
1) Damping elements are included.
Drilling Plan
C3
Dimensions
C C C1 C2 C3
min. max.
C1
M6
EK 175 – – EK 175 73 375 140 140 160
C2
KM1 KM2
Contactors Dimensions
KM1 KM2 C1 C2 C3 2) C4
KM1 KM2
EH 145 – – EH 145 120 110 35 110
2) Includes space for mechanical interlock.
Contactors Dimensions
KM1 KM2 C1 C2 C3 2) C4
KM1 KM2
Contactors
KM1 KM2
Dimensions
C1 C2 9
EH 370/550 – – EH 370/550 265 450
EH 700 – – EH 700 265 550
EH 800 – – EH 800 265 550
Dimensions
KM1 Main KM3 KM2 B H P
BED 145 EH 145 EH 145 A 110 343 171 143
BSD 210 EH 175 EH 175 EH 145 417.5–441.5 198 168
BSD 210 EH 210 EH 210 EH 175 429–453 198 168
BSD 300 EH 300 EH 300 EH 210 517.5–531.5 207 178 1)
BSD 550 EH 370 EH 370 EH 260 665 287 226 1)
BSD 550 EH 550 EH 550 EH 260 665 287 226 1)
BSD 700 EH 700 EH 700 EH 550 776 294 226 1)
BSD 800 EH 800 EH 800 EH 550 776 344 226 1)
1) Damping elements are included.
Drilling Plans
Contactors Dimensions
KM1 KM3 KM2
KM1 Main KM3 KM2 C1 C2 C3 1) C4 C5 2) C6 C7
EH 145 EH 145 A 110 120 110 17–37 110 15-37 78 128
1) Includes space for 2 to 4 auxiliary contact blocks between the contactors.
2) Includes space for 1 to 3 auxiliary contact blocks between the contactors.
6
Contactors Dimensions
KM1 Main KM3 KM2 C1 C2 C3 3) C4 C5 4) C6 C7
KM1 KM3 KM2
EH 210 EH 210 EH 175 140 120 17–41 120 36 120 140
EH 300 EH 300 EH 210 140 160 23–37 160 35.5 120 140
EH 370/550 EH 370/550 EH 260 200 170 70 170 70 160 140
EH 700 EH 700 EH 550 200 220 70 220 70 170 200
EH 800 EH 800 EH 550 200 220 70 220 70 170 200
3) Includes space for 1 to 4 auxiliary contact blocks between the contactors.
4) Includes space for mechanical interlock.
A* B* C* A* B* C*
LT 300-E EH 260, EH 300 399 159 184 209 47 72 97 178
LT 550-E EH 370, EH 550 464 193 218 243 47 72 97 201
LT 700-E EH 700 465 193 218 243 47 72 97 246
LT 800-E EH 800 465 193 218 243 47 72 97 266
LT 150-EK EK 110, EK 150 280 153 178 203 47 72 97 168
LT 210-EK EK 175, EK 210 340 158 183 208 47 72 97 202
LT 550-EK EK 370, EK 550 464 193 218 243 47 72 97 268
* Positions of shroud
11 1) 124 111)
143
42 42
91 4
20 D = 11
10
19 110
120
2/T1 4/T2 6/T3
111
288
A1 A2
35.5
40
67.3
14 6
D = 11
(M5)
37
E0220D5
E0222D5
62 4 50
E0221D5
20
11
42 42 126
12 1) 136 12 1)
45 45 168.5
D = 11 103.5 5
134 2)
20
10
10 (M6)
A1 A2
1/L1 3/L2 5/L3
140
315
15 E0223D5
120
14 6
D = 11
E0225D5
74 4
E0224D5
20
11
42 42 138
12 1) 136 12 1)
45 45 168.5
20 D = 11 103.5 5
134 2)
10
(M6)
10
A1 A2
1/L1 3/L2 5/L3
140
15
120
66
55
E0226D5
2 4 6
11
6 22 76 (M5)
E0228D5
E0227D5
20 46 5
58 58 D = 11 173
25 D = 11
103.7 5
134 2)
10 (M6)
A1 A2
1/L1 3/L2 5/L3
140
2/T1 4/T2 6/T3
345
166.5
30
160
66
55
E0229D5
12
42 76 (M5)
6
E0230D5
E0231D5
25 46 5
D = 11
58 58 173
25 D = 11 140 6
23 M10 (M6)
200
417
A1 A2 40
170
76
55
E0234D5
6
47 76 (M5)
E0233D5
E0232D5
D = 11 25 46 5
12
58 58 173
25 D = 11 140 6
23
M10
(M6)
2/T1 4/T2 6/T3
214
A1 A2 40
Pour M6
170
9
80
2 46
E0238D5
12
6
44 82 (M6)
E0235D5
30
E0236D5
61 5
83 83 D=11 209
M10 (M6)
20
23
200
447.5
A1 A2 40
220
78
80
17.5
E0241D5
6
69 82 (M6)
E0240D5
E0239D5
40 60 6
83 83 D = 11 209
50 D = 11 140 6
23 M10
(M6)
34.5
200
531.5
A1 A2
40
248
220
108
80
34.5
2 46
E0865D
6
69 82 (M6)
E0243D5
E0244D5
40 58 8
20
D = 11 83 83 209
TA 25 DU
ABB97001
*Refers to TA 25 DU 32 type
TA 25 DU + DB 25 Drilling Plan
(TA 25 DU + DB 25/25 A or DB 25/32 A
for independent mounting)
ABB 84 7563/1
ABB97002
*Refers to TA 25 DU 32 type
**Refers to DB 25/32 A mounting kit
TA 25 DU + DS 25-A TA 25 DU + DR 25-A
ABB97004
ABB97003
TA 42 DU
9
ABB97006
ABB97005
TA 75 DU TA 80 DU
ABB97008
ABB97010
ABB97007
ABB97009
*Refers to TA 75 DU 80 type
SST 037 90 M
SST 071 91 M/2
SST 036 90 M
Reference Index
List of Addresses
Contents
Alphabetic Order acc. to Type .......................................................................................... 10/2
Alphabetic Order acc. to Designation ............................................................................... 10/4
ABB Agencies and Representatives throughout the World .............................................. 10/8
10
Low Voltage Products 10/1
1SBC 0004 99 R1001
Main Summary
Section
A E
A 9 to A 110 3-pole Contactors - A.C. Operated 2/12 E 16 DU Electronic O/L Relay 5/19
4-pole Contactors - A.C. Operated 2/16
EH 145 to EH 800 3-pole Contactors - A.C. and D.C. Operated 2/13, 2/15
A 9-22 to A 75-22 4-pole Contactors with N.O. and N.C. Main Poles
A.C. Operated 2/18 EK 110 to EK 550 4-pole Contactors - A.C. and D.C. Operated 2/16, 2/17
AE 45 22 to AE 75-22 4-pole Contactors with N.O. and N.C. Main Poles EHL 3-pole Magnetically Latched Contactors 2/29
D.C. Operated 2/19 EKL 4-pole Magnetically Latched Contactors 2/29
AE 50 to AE 110 3-pole Contactors - D.C. Operated 2/15
AF 45 to AF 110 Contactors with Controlled Supply 2/26 G
AT 450 and AT 900 Kits for Mounting
GA 75 and GAE 75 Contactors for D.C. Circuit Switching 2/28
T 450 DU/SU, TA 900 DU/SU Thermal O/L Relays
on EH 175 to EH 800 Contactors 5/7
K
B K6 Mini Contactor Relays - A.C. Operated 6/6
B 6 and B 7 Mini Contactors - A.C. Operated 6/2 K6 S Mini Contactor Relays for PLC Outputs 6/6
B6 S and B7 S Mini Contactors for PLC Outputs 6/5 KC Contactor Relays - D.C. Operated 3/6
BA 5-50 Function Markers 4/19, 5/9 KC 6 Interface Mini Contactor Relays 6/6
BC 6 and BC 7 Mini Contactors - D.C. Operated 6/2 Mini Contactor Relays - D.C. Operated 6/6
Interface Mini Contactors 6/5 KBC 30G D.C. Coil for KC Contactor Relays
BC 9-22 to BC 25-22 4-pole Contactors with N.O. and N.C. Main Poles and BC 9 to BC 30 Contactors 4/29
D.C. Operated 2/19 KH A.C. or D.C. Coil for EH and EK Contactors 4/30
BC 9-30 to BC 30-30 3-pole Contactors - D.C. Operated 2/14 KL and KZ Main Contact Sets
BC 9-40 to BC 25-40 4-pole Contactors - D.C. Operated 2/17 for BC, TBC and EH 3-pole Contactors 4/28
BED and BSD Connections for Star-Delta Starters 4/25 KP Set including : 4/30
- 1 D.C. Coil + 1 Economy Resistor
BEM, BSH and BSM Connections for Reversing Contactors 4/24
+ 1 Insertion Contact for EH and EK Contactors
BES Connections (downstream) for 3-pole contactors 4/24 or
BES and BSS Connections for 4-pole Reversing Contactors 4/24 - 1 Multi-frequency coil + 1 Insertion Contact
for EH and EK Contactors with built-in rectifier
BL5-F Fuse Holder Block 4/19
KW Arc Chutes for EH and EK Contactors 4/28
BL5-L Lamp Holder Block 4/19
KX 800 A.C. or D.C. Coil
BN 6 Plunger for Manual Operation on Mini Contactors 6/7 for Mechanical Latching Units
BSM 6-30 Connecting Strip for VB and VBC on EH 145 to EH 800 Contactors 4/30
Compact Reversing Contactors 6/7 KZK Main Contact sets
BX-TP Sealing Cover for TP Pneumatic Timer 4/8 for EK 110 to EK 550 4-pole Contactors 4/28
C L
CA 5-01, CA 5-10 1-pole Auxiliary Contact Blocks 4/4 LB 6, LB 6-CA Base with Soldering Pins
for Mini Contactors and Auxiliary Contacts 6/7
CA 5...E, CA 5...M and CA 5...N
4-pole Auxiliary Contact Blocks 4/4 LC 16, LC 25 and LC 26
Flat Pin Terminal Blocks
CA 6 and CAF 6 Auxiliary Contact Blocks for Mini Contactors 6/7 for N and KC Contactor Relays
CA 16 Additionnal Contact Blocks and A9 to A 26, BC 9 to BC 25 Contactors 4/21
for VH and VHV Interlock Units 4/11 LC 30-T, LC 26-B1 Flat Pin Terminal Blocks
CAL 5-11 2-pole Auxiliary Contact Block 4/4 for TA 25 DU Thermal O/L Relays and DB 25 Kit 5/7
CAL 16 and CCL 16 2-pole Auxiliary Contact Blocks 4/4 LD 110 Additional Terminal Block 4/22
N U
N Contactor Relays - A.C. Operated 3/6 UA 26 to UA 110 3-pole Contactors
for 3-phase Capacitor Switching 2/21
UA 16.. -R to UA 75.. -R
O 3-pole Contactors c/w resistors
OXFB Single Connectors for Cu Cables for 3-phase Capacitor Switching 2/22
S W
SK 824 to SK 828 EH 145 to EH 800 Mechanically
Interlocked Contactors - Side by Side Mounting 2/30 WB 75-A and WH Mechanical Latching Units 4/12
EH 145 to EH 800
Mechanically Latched Contactors 2/30 Z
ZA A.C. Coils for N Contactor Relays
T and A, UA, UA..-R Contactors 4/29
TP ... IA
(Timing on Energization)
Pneumatic Timer Block
(Timing on De-energization)
4/8, 4/9 10
Low Voltage Products 10/3
1SBC 0004 99 R1001
Section
Section
A C (cont.)
Accessoriability: Connection (Mode and Capacity) 7/14, 7/15
- A, AE Contactors 2/7, 4/2 Connection of Main Poles (Parallel Connection) 2/54
- BC Contactors 2/11 Connection for 3-pole Contactors (downstream connections) 4/24
- EH, EK Contactors 2/9, 4/2 Connections for 4-pole Reversing Contactors 4/25
- KC, TKC Contactor Relays 3/5 Connections for Control Leads 4/18
- N Contactor Relays 3/3, 4/2 Connections for Reversing Contactors 4/24
- TAE, TBC Contactors 2/24 Connections for Star-Delta Starters 4/25
Accessories for A, AE, EH and EK Contactors Connection - Terminal Marking and Positioning:
and N Contactor Relays - Compatibility 4/3 - Contactors - Thermal O/L Relays 8/1...8/9
Accessories for Contactors and N Contactor Relays 4/1 Connection - Terminal Marking and Positioning:
Accessories for Contactor Connection Terminals 4/22 - Mini Contactors - Mini Contactor Relays 6/14
Accessories for Mini Contactors 6/7 Connectors for EH and EK Contactors 4/21
Accessories for Mounting of the TA and T Thermal O/L Relays 5/7...5/9 Connectors for T 200 DU Thermal O/L Relays 5/9
Accessories for TKC Contactor Relays 3/7 Contacts:
Amp-rating acc. to CSA and UL 7/7 - Additional Contacts for Mechanical and Electrical Interlock Units 4/11
Approvals and Certifications 7/4...7/7 - Auxiliary Contacts 4/4, 4/5
Approvals: Mini Contactors - Mini Contactor Relays - O/L Relays 6/13, 6/19 - Auxiliary Contacts for Mini Contactors 6/7
Arc Chutes for Contactors 4/28 - CB 5 Impulse Contacts 4/18
- Main Contact Sets for Contactors 4/28
Contactors:
● A and AE Contactors: Description 2/6
B ● AF Contactors 2/26
● BC Contactors: Description 2/10
Base with Soldering Pins for Mini Contactors 6/7 ● EH and EK Contactors: Description 2/8
Blocks (Accessory Blocks): ● EH Mechanically Interlocked Contactors 2/30
- Additional Contact Blocks for Mechanical ● EH Mechanically Latched Contactors 2/30
and Electrical Interlock Units 4/11 ● EHL and EKL Magnetically Latched Contactors 2/29
- Auxiliary Contact Blocks 4/4, 4/5 ● GA75 and GAE75 Contactors 2/28
- Auxiliary Contact Blocks for Mini Contactors 6/7 ● UA Contactors 2/21
- Auxiliary Contact Blocks with Varistor for AE Contactors 4/29
● UA..-R Contactors 2/22
- BL5-F Fuse Holder Block 4/19
● A 3-pole Contactors - A.C. Operated:
- BL5-L Lamp Holder Block 4/19
- Ordering Details 2/12
- Flat Pin Terminal Blocks for Contactors 4/21 - Selection Table 2/2, 2/3
- Flat Pin Terminal Blocks for Thermal O/L Relays 5/7 - Technical Data 2/32-34-36
- Impulse Contact Block - CB 5 Type 4/18 ● AE 3-pole Contactors - D.C. Operated:
- Surge Suppressor Blocks 4/14, 4/15
- Ordering Details 2/15
- Surge Suppressors Blocks for Mini Contactors 6/7
- Technical Data 2/38-40-42
- TP Pneumatic Timer Block 4/8, 4/9 ● AF Contactors 3 and 4-pole
BV Bureau Veritas: see "Other Specifications and Certifications" 7/2 with Controlled Supply A.C./D.C.Operated:
- Description 2/26
- Technical Data 2/26
- Ordering Details 2/27
C ● BC 3-pole Contactors - D.C. Operated:
Coil: Voltage Code for Mini Contactors - Mini Contactor Relays 6/1 - Ordering Details 2/17
Coil: Voltage Code for TKC Contactor Relays 3/7 - Technical Data 2/38-40-42
Coil with Controlled Supply, A.C./D.C.: AF Contactors 2/26 ● BC 4-pole Contactors
Conformity (Standards - Approvals - Certification) 7/3...7/7 with N.O and N.C. Main Poles - D.C. Operated:
Connecting Auxiliaries for Control Leads 4/18 - Ordering Details 2/19
- Technical Data 2/38-40-42
C (cont.) F
● EK 4-pole Contactors - A.C. Operated: Faston:
- Ordering Details 2/16 - see Flat Pin Terminal Blocks for Contactors 4/21
- Selection Table 2/4, 2/5 - see Flat Pin Terminal Blocks for Thermal O/L Relays 5/7
- Technical Data 2/33-35-37 Fitting of Accessories - A and AE Contactors 2/7, 4/2
● EK 4-pole Contactors - D.C. Operated: Fitting of Accessories - BC Contactors 2/11
- Ordering Details 2/17 Fitting of Accessories - EH and EK Contactors 2/9, 4/2
- Technical Data 2/39-41-43 Fitting of Accessories - KC and TKC Contactor Relays 3/5
● TAE and TBC Contactors 2/24 Fitting of Accessories - N Contactor Relays 3/3, 4/2
● UA 3-pole Contactors 2/21 Fixing - Drilling plans - Screw Diameter: see “Dimensions” 9/1
● UA..-R 3-pole Contactors 2/22, 2/23 Fuses 5/14
Contactor Relays - N Type:
- Description 3/2
- Ordering Details 3/6
- Technical Data 3/8, 3/9 G
Contactor Relays - KC Type:
General Technical Data 7/2...7/16
- Description 3/4
- Ordering Details 3/6
- Technical Data 3/8, 3/9
H
Contactor Relays - TKC Type:
- Description 3/4 Holder for Fuse - BL 5-F Type 4/19
- Ordering Details 3/7 Holder for Lamp - BL 5-L Type 4/19
- Technical Data 3/7
Control of 3-phase Slip-ring Motors 2/50
Control Circuit: Influence of the Length
of the Contactor Control Circuit 2/52, 2/53 I
Controlled Supply - A.C./D.C. Operated 2/26
Cover for Mini Contactors (Protective Cover) 6/7 Identification Marker - BA 5-50 Type 4/19, 5/9
Cover for TP Pneumatic Timers (Sealing Cover) 4/8 Identification Marker for Mini Contactors 6/7
CSA: see “Specifications in Canada and the USA” 7/2 IEC: see “International Specifications” 7/2
Current: Motor Nominal Currents - Table of Values 0/0 IEC 947-4-1 - Co-ordination Table,
with the Short-Circuit Protection Devices 7/17...7/21
Current (Direct current): see “D.C. Circuit Switching” 2/46, 6/12
Influence of the Conductor Length for the Contactor Control Circuit 2/52, 2/53
Interface Relays for PLC Outputs - RA 5 and RA 30 Types 4/16, 4/17
Interlock Units (Mechanical and Electrical) 4/10, 4/11
IP Degrees of Protection 7/12
D ISO: see “International Specifications” 7/2
D.C. Circuit Switching: ISO 9000 see “Quality” - (on the back of General Content) Ch. 0
- Contactors 2/46…2/48
- Mini Contactors and Compact Reversing Contactors 6/11
Description of A and AE Contactors 2/6
Description of BC Contactors 2/10 J
Description of EH and EK Contactors 2/8 Joule Losses per Phase and Resistance
Description of EHL and EKL Magnetically Latched Contactors 2/29 (E 16 DU Electronic O/L Relays) 5/22
Description of EHL and EKL Mechanically Latched Contactors 2/30 Joule Losses per Phase and Resistance
Description of GA75 and GAE75 Contactors 2/28 (TA and T Thermal O/L Relays) 5/15, 5/16
Description of KC and TKC Contactor Relays 3/4 Joule Losses per Phase and Resistance
Description of N Contactor Relays 3/2 (T 7 DU Thermal O/L Relays) 6/19
Description of TAE and TBC Contactors 2/24
Diagrams for Star-Delta Starters 8/10
Diagrams: see "Terminal Marking and Positioning" 8/1...8/9
Dimensions: K
- Contactors - Contactor Relays - Thermal O/L Relays - Accessories 9/1
- Mini Contactors - Mini Contactor Relays 6/15, 6/16 Kits for mounting T 450 DU/SU
- Plates for EH and EK Contactors 4/27 and T900 DU/SU Thermal O/L Relays on EH 175 to EH 800 Contactors 5/7
Directives: Kits for Separate mounting TA 25 DU to T 200 DU Thermal O/L Relays 5/7
- 73/23/CEE Low Voltage Directive: see “European Directives” 7/2
- 89/336/CEE Electromagnetic Compatibility Directive:
see “European Directives” 7/2
- 89/392/CEE Machine Directive: see “European Directives” 7/2 L
DNV Det Norske Veritas: see "Other Specifications and Certifications" 7/2
Drilling plans: see “Dimensions” 9/1 Latching Units 4/12, 4/13
Durability: Liability (on the back of General Content) Ch. 0
- Electrical Durability and Utilization Categories of Contactors 2/55...2/60 Lighting Circuit Switching:
Duty (Intermittent Duty and Temporary Duty): Suitable Coefficient 2/54 - Contactors Selection 2/44, 2/45
- Mini Contactors and Compact Reversing Contactors Selection 6/11
LRS Lloyd’s Register of Shipping:
see "Other Specifications and Certifications" 7/2
E
Electrical Durability, Utilization Categories of Contactors 2/55…2/60
Electronic O/L Relay - E 16 DU
Enlargement Terminal Parts - LW Type
5/19
4/22 10
European Directives 7/2
Extension Terminal Parts - LX Type 4/22
M O (cont.)
Marking: - EH Mechanically Interlocked Contactors 2/30
- CE Marking: see “European Directives” 7/2 - EH Mechanically Latched Contactors 2/30
- Marking of Contactors and Contactor Relays 8/2 - EHL and EKL Magnetically Latched Contactors 2/29
- Terminal Marking and Positioning: - EK 4-pole Contactors - A.C. Operated 2/16
Contactors - Thermal O/L Relays 8/3...8/9 - EK 4-pole Contactors - D.C. Operated 2/17
- Terminal Marking and Positioning: - Flat Pin Terminal Blocks for Contactors 4/21
Mini Contactors - Mini Contactor Relays 6/14
- Flat Pin Terminal Blocks for Thermal O/L Relays 5/7
- Terminal Marking: General - Standards 8/2
- Function Marker for Mini Contactors 6/7
Mini Contactors - Mini Contactors Relays - Mini Thermal O/L Relays:
- GA75 and GAE75 Contactors 2/28
- B(C) 6 and B(C) 7 Mini Contactors 6/2
- K6 S Mini Contactor Relays for PLC Outputs 6/6
- B6 S and B7 S Mini Contactors for PLC Outputs 6/5
- K(C) 6 Mini Contactor Relays 6/6
- BC 6 and BC 7 Interface Mini Contactors 6/5
- KC 6 Interface Mini Contactor Relays 6/6
- K6 S Mini Contactor Relays for PLC Outputs 6/6
- LD 110 Additional Terminal Block 4/22
- K(C) 6 Mini Contactor Relays 6/6
- LK Control Lead Terminals 4/18
- KC 6 Interface Mini Contactor Relays 6/6
- LW Enlargement Terminal Parts 4/22
- T 7 DU Mini Thermal O/L Relays 6/17
- LX Extension Terminal Parts 4/22
- TBC 7 Mini Contactors - TKC 6 Mini Contactor Relays 6/8
- Main Contact Sets for Contactors 4/28
- VB(C) 6, VB(C) 7, VB(C) 6A and VB(C) 7A Compact Reversing Contactors 6/3
- Main Terminal Shrouds for T 200 DU
Motor Nominal Powers - Table of values 0/0 to T900 DU/SU Thermal O/L Relays 5/9
Motor Protection - Choice of Protection Device 5/14 - Mechanical and Electrical Interlock Units 4/11
Motor-rating acc. to CSA, UL 7/6 - Mechanical Latching Units 4/12
Motors: EEx e Protection Motor (Choice of Thermal O/L Relays) 5/18 - Mounting Kits for Thermal O/L Relays 5/7
Motors: Nominal Powers and Currents 0/0 - N and KC Contactor Relays 3/6
Mounting Distance between BC Contactors 2/14, 2/17 - O/L Relays 5/1
Mounting Distance between BC 4-pole Contactors - Plates for Contactors 4/26
with N.O. and N.C. Main Poles 2/19
- Plunger for Manual Operation on Mini Contactors 6/7
Mounting Distance between KC and TKC Contactor Relays 3/6,3/7
- Protective Cover for Mini Contactor 6/7
Mounting Positions - AE and BC 4-pole Contactors
with N.O. and N.C. Main Poles 2/19 - RA 5 and RA 30 Interface Relays 4/16
Mounting Positions - BC Contactors 2/14, 2/17 - Remote Resetting Coil for TA 25 DU Thermal O/L Relays 5/8
Mounting Positions - KC Contactor Relays 3/6 - Remote Tripping Coil for TA 25 DU Thermal O/L Relays 5/8
- Sealing Cover for TP Pneumatic Timers 4/8
- Surge Suppressor Blocks 4/15
- Surge Suppressor Blocks for Mini Contactors 6/7
O - T 7 DU Thermal O/L Relay for Mini Contactors 6/17
- TA and T Thermal O/L Relays 5/4...5/6
Ordering Details - General Informations 0/2 - TAE and TBC Contactors 2/24
Ordering Details: - TBC 7 Mini Contactors - TKC 6 Mini Contactor Relays 6/8
- A 3-pole Contactors - A.C. Operated 2/12 - TE 5S Electronic Timer 4/6
- A 4-pole Contactors - A.C. Operated 2/16 - Terminal Connecting Strips 4/20
- A 4-pole Contactors with N.O. and N.C. Main Poles 2/18 - TKC Contactor Relays 3/7
- AE 3-pole Contactors - D.C. Operated 2/15 - TP Pneumatic Timer Blocks 4/8
- AE 4-pole Contactors - D.C. Operated 2/17 - UA 3-pole Contactors 2/21
- AF 3 and 4-pole Contactors with Controlled Supply 2/26 - UA..-R 3-pole Contactors 2/22, 2/23
- Arc Chutes for Contactors 4/28
- Auxiliary Contact Blocks 4/4
- Auxiliary Contact Blocks for Mini Contactors 6/7
- B(C) 6, B(C) 7 Mini Contactors 6/2 P
- B6 S and B7 S Mini Contactors for PLC Outputs 6/5
- BA 5-50 Identification Marker 4/19, 5/9 Packaging - General Informations 0/2
- Base for Mini Contactors 6/7 Packaging of the Equipment and Accessories:
see “Ordering Details” Pages -
- BC 3-pole Contactors - D.C. Operated 2/14
Plates for Contactors 4/26, 4/27
- BC 4-pole Contactors - D.C. Operated 2/17
Plunger for Manual Operation on Mini Contactors 6/7
- BC 6, BC 7 Interface Mini Contactors 6/5
Product Range Présentation 1/2...1/6
- BC and AE 4-pole Contactors with N.O. and N.C. Main Poles 2/19
Protection - IP Protection Degrees 7/12
- BL 5-F Fuse Holder Blocks 4/19
Protection Devices - Co-ordination 7/17...7/21
- BL 5-L Lamp Holder Blocks 4/19
Protection: Choice of Motor Protection Device 5/14
- CB 5 Impulse Contact Block 4/18
PRS Polski Rejestr Statkow: see "Other Specifications and Certifications" 7/2
- Coil for Mechanical Latching Units 4/30
- Compact Reversing Contactors 6/3, 6/4
- Connecting Strip for Compact Reversing Contactors 6/7
- Connecting Strips for Mini Contactors 6/7
- Connections for 3-pole Contactors (downstream connections) 4/24
Q
- Connections for 4-pole Reversing Contactors 4/25 Quality Assurance: see “Quality” (on the back of General Content) Section 0
- Connections for Reversing Contactors 4/24
- Connections for Star-Delta Starters 4/25
- Connectors for EH and EK Contactors
and T 200 DU Thermal O/L Relay 4/21, 5/9
- Contactor Coils 4/29
- DX 25 Widening Terminal Block 5/7
- EH 3-pole Contactors - A.C. Operated 2/13
- EH 3-pole Contactors - D.C. Operated 2/15
R T (cont.)
Resistance and Joule Losses per Phase - VB 6, VBC 6, VB 6A and VBC 6A Compact Reversing Contactors 6/9
(E 16 DU Electronic O/L Relay) 5/22 - VB 7, VBC 7, VB 7A and VBC 7A Compact Reversing Contactors 6/10
Resistance and Joule Losses per Phase - RA 5 and RA 30 Interface Relays 4/17
(T7 DU Thermal O/L Relay) 6/19 - TA and T Thermal O/L Relays 5/11...5/13
Resistance and Joule Losses per Phase - T 7 DU Thermal O/L Relay 6/17
(TA and T Thermal O/L Relays) 5/15, 5/16 - TE5S Electronic Timer 4/7
R.I.Na Registro Italiano Navale: - Mechanical and Electrical Interlock Units 4/11
see "Other Specifications and Certifications" 7/2 - Mechanical Latching Units 4/13
- Surge Suppressor Blocks 4/15
- TP Pneumatic Timer Blocks 4/9
Terminal Block for A 95, A 110, AE 95 and AE 110:
S - LD 110 Additional Block 4/22
Terminal Block for TA 25 DU ≤ 25 or DB 22/25 A:
Screw: Screw for Control Lead Connection - Widening Terminal Block 5/7
to the Main Poles of EH and EK Contactors 4/18 Terminals for Auxiliary Control Lead - LK Type 4/18
Selection Guide - Star-Delta Starting 2/31 Terminals: Contactors - Thermal O/L Relays:
Sets: see "Terminal Marking and Positioning" 8/1...8/9
- Coil Sets for EH and EK Contactors 4/29 Terminals: Mini Contactors - Contactor Relays:
- Main Contact Sets for Contactors 4/28 see “Terminal Marking and Positioning” 6/14
- Power Connection Sets 4/24, 4/25 Terms and Technical Definitions 7/8, 7/9
Short Circuit Protection - Co-ordination with Protection Devices 7/17...7/21 Test Certifying Organizations 7/3
Shrouds for Main Terminals (EH and EK Contactors) 4/23 Thermal O/L Relays:
Shrouds for Main Terminal TA and T Thermal O/L Relays: Description 5/10
(T 200 DU and T 900 DU/SU Thermal O/L Relays) 5/9 TA and T Thermal O/L Relays: Ordering Details 5/4...5/6
Standards: TA and T Thermal O/L Relays: Panorama 5/2, 5/3
- IEC 947-4-1 Standard 7/17...7/21 TA and T Thermal O/L Relays: Selection Table 2/2, 2/3
- National, European and International Standards 7/3 TA and T Thermal O/L Relays: Technical Data 5/11...5/13
- Standards, Specifications and Certifying Organizations 7/2 TA and T Thermal O/L Relays: Tripping Curves 5/17
- Terminal Marking Standards 8/2 Thermal O/L Relays T 7 DU for Mini Contactors 6/18
Slip-ring Motor Switching 2/50 Thermal O/L Relays for Protection of the EEx e Motors
Star-Delta Starters - Diagrams 8/10 - Choice of Thermal O/L Relays 5/18
Star-Delta Starting - Control Gear Selecting Guide 2/31 Tightening Torques 7/16
Strips : Timer for Star-Delta Starters: TE 5S Electronic Timer 4/6, 4/7
- Connecting Strip for Compact Reversing Contactors 6/7 TP Pneumatic Timer Block 4/8, 4/9
- Connecting Strip for Mini Contactors 6/7 Transformer Switching - Selection of Contactors 2/49
- Terminal Connecting Strips for Contactors 4/20 Tripping Curves for TA and T Thermal O/L Relays 5/17
Surge Suppressors for Contactor Coils 4/14, 4/15 Tripping Curves for T 7 DU Thermal O/L Relay 6/17
Switching:
- Capacitor Switching:
see “Contactors for 3-phase Capacitor Switching” 2/20…2/23 U
- D.C. Circuit Switching - Contactors 2/46…2/48
- D.C. Circuit Switching - Mini Contactors - UL: see “Specifications in Canada and the USA” 7/2
Compact Reversing Contactors 6/11 Utilization Categories and Electrical Durability 2/55…2/60
- Selection of Contactors for Lighting Circuits 2/44
- Selection of Mini Contactors
and Compact Reversing Contactors for Lighting Circuits 6/12
- Transformer Switching (LV/LV 3-phase Transformer) 2/49 V
Varistor:
- see “CDL5-01 and CCL5-01 Auxiliary Devices”. 4/29
T - see “Surge Suppressor Blocks” for Contactors Coils. 4/14, 4/15
- see “Surge Suppressor Blocks” for Mini Contactors. 6/7
Tables for Co-ordination with the Short-Circuit Protection Devices 7/17...7/21 Voltage for Coil Supply:
Table for Selection of A and EH 3-pole Contactors (A.C. Operated) - Order Code Supplement: Contactors - N and KC Contactor Relays 0/1
and Thermal O/L Relays 2/2, 2/3 - Order Code Supplement: Mechanical Latching Units 4/12
Table for Selection of A and EK 4-pole Contactors (A.C. Operated) 2/4, 2/5 - Order Code Supplement: Mini Contactors - Mini Contactor Relays 6/1
Table for Selection of TA and T Thermal O/L Relays 5/2, 5/3 - Order Code Supplement: TKC Contactor Relays 3/7
Table of Motor Nominal Powers and Currents 0/0
Technical data:
- Auxiliary Contact Blocks 4/5
- A Contactors - A.C. Operated 2/32-34-36 W
- BC and AE Contactors - D.C. Operated 2/38-40-42
- EH and EK Contactors - A.C. Operated 2/33-35-37 Weight of the Equipment and Accessories: see pages “Ordering Details” -
- EH and EK Contactors - D.C. Operated 2/39-41-43 Withstand of Devices (Climatic Conditions) 7/13
- TAE and TBC Contactors 2/24
- N and KC Contactor Relays 3/8, 3/9
- TKC Contactor Relays 3/7
- B 6, BC 6 and B 6S Mini Contactors 6/9
- B 7, BC 7 and B 7S Mini Contactors 6/10
- K 6 and KC 6 Mini Contactor Relays 6/9
10
Low Voltage Products 10/7
1SBC 0004 99 R1001
Section
Main Summary Section
Further information about non listed countries, product availability, technical back-up and service, please consult-us.
Phone and fax numbers do not include the code (0) for local calls in the country - The code between ( ) is the international one.
Further information about non listed countries, product availability, technical back-up and service, please consult-us.
10
Phone and fax numbers do not include the code (0) for local calls in the country - The code between ( ) is the international one.
Further information about non listed countries, product availability, technical back-up and service, please consult-us.
Phone and fax numbers do not include the code (0) for local calls in the country - The code between ( ) is the international one.